462. Classroom Mindscapes

Neurodivergent students bring varied strengths, needs, and ways of thinking to our classrooms. In this episode, Sarah Silverman joins us to discuss teaching strategies that reduce access friction, increase tolerance for error, and create more inclusive learning experiences for everyone.

Sarah is an educator and faculty developer focusing on neurodiversity, disability studies, and inclusive instructional design. She currently teaches disability studies at multiple institutions. Sarah is the author of Classroom Mindscapes: An Introduction to Neurodiversity for Educators, which will be released later this month as part of the Teaching, Engaging, and Thriving in Higher Ed series at the University of Oklahoma Press.

Show Notes

  • Silverman, Sarah (2026). Classroom Mindscapes: An Introduction to Neurodiversity for Educators. Oklahoma University Press
  • Walker, N. (2021). Neuroqueer heresies: notes on the neurodiversity paradigm, autistic empowerment, and postnormal possibilities. Autonomous Press Fort Worth.
  • Transparency in Learning and Teaching (TILT)
  • Price, M. (2011). Mad at school: Rhetorics of mental disability and academic life. University of Michigan Press.
  • Pusateri, Jennifer L. (2026). A Practical Guide to Teaching Neurodivergent College Students. Harvard Education Press.
  • Jennifer Pusateri (2026). Teaching Neurodivergent College Students. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 446. May 20
  • Costa, K. (2026). An Educator’s Guide to ADHD. Johns Hopkins University Press.
  • Karen Costa (2026). An Educator’s Guide to ADHD. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 429.
  • Autreat

Transcript

John: Neurodivergent students bring varied strengths, needs, and ways of thinking to our classrooms. In this episode, we explore teaching strategies that reduce access friction, increase tolerance for error, and create more inclusive learning experiences for everyone.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

Rebecca: Our guest today is Sarah Silverman. Sarah is an educator and faculty developer focusing on neurodiversity, disability studies, and inclusive instructional design. She currently teaches disability studies at multiple institutions. Sarah is the author of Classroom Mindscapes: An Introduction to Neurodiversity for Educators, which will be released later this month as part of the Teaching, Engaging, and Thriving in Higher Ed series at the University of Oklahoma Press. Welcome, Sarah.

Sarah: Thank you so much for having me. I’m really happy to be here.

John: We’re really happy to finally have you on. I follow you on LinkedIn and other places, so it’s nice to actually have a chance to talk to you.

Sarah: Yeah, absolutely.

John: Today’s teas are:… Sarah, are you drinking any tea with us?

Sarah: So, I’m not literally drinking tea at the moment, but I’ve had multiple cups of tea over the past 12 to 18 hours or something. I have to admit I’m more of a coffee person, but I would say it’s more like a 60-40 split of like total consumption towards coffee.

Rebecca: All right. Well, I like that you play on both teams.

Sarah: Yeah, I do play on both teams, [LAUGHTER] and I have to give a shout out to my mom and grandmother who are both big tea fans as well. So if they happen to listen to this, that’s where I got my love of tea from.

Rebecca: Wonderful. My grandmother was a big tea drinker as well.

John: Mine too. Whenever my brother and I were ill as a child, we always had tea we were supposed to drink to cure is somehow… and eventually it worked.

Sarah: Yeah, I think there’s something to that. [LAUGHTER]

Rebecca: Tea is actually one of the very few things that I don’t like when I’m sick. I only like it when I’m very well. I have English breakfast today, John.

John: And I have ginger peach green tea today.

Rebecca: Nice. So, Sarah, we invited you here today to discuss Classroom Mindscapes. Can you talk a little bit about how this book project came about?

Sarah: Sure. So this book project came about, I would say, because of a number of intersecting and kind of colliding interests of mine. So, it helps to say a little bit about my own background, which is that I got my PhD in a STEM field, in biology. It was actually the field of entomology, which is the study of insects. So that’s a fun fact about me. But while I was doing that, I worked at the Teaching and Learning Center that was on the UC Davis campus, the Center for Educational Effectiveness, and I eventually went into that field and worked at a couple of similar places after that. So I became someone who focuses on teaching and faculty development, and I also had another area of interest, which is disability studies, which I was teaching in and researching, and also connecting to some of my own life experiences with neurodiversity. And one of the things I started noticing a couple of years ago is that there’s a huge amount of interest in the subject of neurodiversity in higher education, but not a lot of specific knowledge of the history and context. And I had taught mostly undergrad classes for a while, one part of them was exploring the history of neurodiversity and what this concept meant, and where it came from, and what its relevance is in the larger disability conversation. And I began to think to myself, I think that college teachers would really get a lot out of having a concise overview of this and having some ideas about how they might apply this knowledge to their classroom teaching. So yeah, I think that’s a little bit about how it came about.

Rebecca: That’s a great story

John: For faculty who are somewhat new to this topic, because as you mentioned, there hasn’t been much discussion of this in higher ed until really recently. How do you define neurodiversity, and how does it differ from the concept of neurodivergence?

Sarah: Yes, sure. I’d be happy to talk about that. I guess this is a good opening note for the whole conversation. Since this is kind of an area of special interest of mine, I have a number of details in the book that people might be interested in, and I’ll give good overviews during our conversation, and if you come away from this saying I really want to know more about that, then yeah, definitely check out my book. It has even more detail, more references, different things like that. So anyway, neurodiversity, we could say, describes the fact of cognitive variation in the human population. So it’s a form of variation, and we have many types of diversity or variation in the human population. So all three of us certainly vary in height. We probably have many other things that we vary in, and similarly, cognition varies between all people. And I’ll go with neurodivergence next. Neurodivergence is a concept that came out of the autistic self-advocacy community, and then became broader, which describes people whose cognition does not align with societal norms or what’s typically understood as normal cognition in society, and sometimes also normal behavior or communication in society. So, someone who’s neurodivergent may have one or more traits that, in a given context, distinguish them as different from the majority of people. And like I said, this is a concept that originally came out of autistic people’s self-advocacy, and neurodiversity also came out of that movement. One thing that people often ask me is: “Is neurodiversity real such a neutral idea?” like okay, you know, humans all vary in cognition, or is it more of a positive spin on this idea? And I think both are true in a sense. It can be used in a very neutral way, just the fact of variation. But the context it comes out of is specific enough to give it a slightly different valence, which is that when autistic people first came together in these communities, primarily online in the mid- to late-1990s, autism was one of the most highly stigmatized diagnoses out there, and this community was searching for a way to think about themselves, to talk about themselves that was not entirely based on deficit and considered more strongly what strengths autistic people may have, how they could lead good lives with appropriate support and acceptance, and so neurodiversity did in some ways emerge in that context as a positive spin on human cognitive variation.

Rebecca: So that seems like a nice segue into one of the things that we often hear are some misconceptions about neurodivergent students. Can you talk a little bit about what some of those misconceptions might be?

Sarah: Sure. Yeah, I can tell you some of the ones that I think are the most common or the most notable. First of all, you may have noticed in my previous definition that I didn’t say neurodivergent people have one of these five diagnosed disabilities, or something like that. So neurodivergence is a concept that exists somewhat in contrast to, but at least alongside, the medical diagnostic model of cognitive variation. So it’s true that a lot of faculty may meet, or teach, or work with students who have a specific diagnosis, such as autism or ADHD, learning disability, or dyslexia, but not all neurodivergent students are going to have such a diagnosis, or even be like theoretically eligible for one if they were to pursue a process. So neurodivergence is much more of a kind of a sociological contextual concept than a medical one, and so it is entirely possible that faculty may work with neurodivergent students who don’t really have any sort of medical diagnosis, and because of that, they also may not be always eligible or interested in academic accommodation. So I think that’s a very common understanding or maybe misunderstanding that everyone who’s neurodivergent will have or will require accommodation. I think alongside that, it’s a pretty common misconception that all neurodivergent students have academic difficulties. That’s not absolutely true. It may be more true for some groups of neurodivergent students than others, but a lot of people who are neurodivergent who are in college now, they may have either developed really good coping mechanisms with great support during their K to 12 journey, their neurodivergence also may not manifest in ways that make the academic environment difficult for them. It may be that they are able to exist well within an academic environment, maybe they experience more social challenges or barriers than academic ones. So not all neurodivergent students require accommodations or will struggle academically. Another really common assumption that sometimes people make is that neurodivergent students either cannot work in groups or won’t be very successful in groups, and I think that sometimes becomes a bit of a self-reinforcing loop where faculty will kind of make this assumption and then not design or offer group activities in a way that is going to be inclusive of a lot of different participants, and then sometimes that results in people kind of asking, “Can I be exempted? Can I use my accommodations to not participate in this group assignment?” And so that’s one thing that I would really love to see people rethink, which is this misconception that neurodivergent students have difficulty working with other people as a general rule, and that’s kind of absolute. I think that that’s a pretty bad misconception. Lastly, I think one misconception that I hear a lot as well is that if somebody is noticeably neurodivergent, then that automatically requires some sort of response from the instructor. One of the most common questions I’ll get in my consulting or faculty development work is, “There’s somebody in my class who I think might be neurodivergent. What should I do?” And my first response is usually, “You certainly don’t have to do anything. As far as I understand, everybody who is admitted to your institution is welcome to take your class.” But if what you’re really saying is, “I’m not having success interacting or communicating with a student in my class,” or “I can see that they’re struggling with something,” or that they’re not getting as much out of interactions with their peers as I hope they would. Well, then, yeah, we can work through that. We can come up with some ideas for how to speak to the student and how to find out what they do need. But yeah, it’s not in any way [LAUGHTER] something that needs to be responded to just because you’ve noticed that somebody might be neurodivergent in your class. Those are a couple that have come up a lot in my work.

Rebecca: That’s a really good summary, Sarah. Thanks.

John: And you noted that not all neurodivergent students need accommodations, but some would benefit from those. But they don’t always request accommodations. Why might some neurodivergent students not seek accommodations? And for those students, how might faculty invite them to relay information so that we can address any needs that they have.

Sarah: So I guess I’ll say that first of all, accommodations are a very important tool in many circumstances. They’re obviously legally required in cases where they’re where students are eligible for them, but there’s a lot of areas… I wrote about a couple in my book… that I’ll just summarize quickly. So one reason may be that a person just fears some sort of adverse judgment because of the stigma of their disability. For example, maybe a student’s been judged negatively in the past because of their learning disability during their previous educational experiences, and they might think that was a negative thing in my life. I wonder if I can avoid that by not disclosing a disability to anybody and seeing how I do on my own, something like that. Another, and this I think is going to be increasingly common because we do know that diagnostic rates are going up for many of these diagnoses, is that the knowledge of the disability or form of neurodivergence, it might be new, or the person doesn’t have yet sufficient information about what they will need, and so they may not yet be sure how to advocate for themselves through the disability office. Though that could also apply to advocating for themselves directly to their instructor. For example, I met a student recently who told me that they are neurodivergent and that they recently went through the ADHD diagnostic process, but they just didn’t know what it meant for their academic life, [LAUGHTER] if anything. And so they said, “I know that you mentioned being interested in neurodiversity, so I thought I’d come and chat about it, but I really don’t know how it’s going to impact things. And they said, “Maybe next semester or the one after, after I have some time to process, I’ll meet with disability services to see.” That’s another. There’s also often additional burden in disclosing a disability and going through the accommodations process in terms of time. It takes a lot of time and energy. They may not feel that they want to spend their limited time [LAUGHTER] on this, as time is limited for everyone. And it also may be the case that somebody knows that they’re neurodivergent and just simply has no diagnosis or anything that would qualify them for accommodations. But even so, they may need some kind of flexibility or may benefit from some sort of flexibility. So I think that kind of covers a whole range of reasons someone might not be in contact with a disability office and request accommodations. So yeah, the second part of your question: How might an instructor signal openness to hearing about somebody’s needs or preferences? So, I can tell you a little bit about what I do, which is a little bit colored by my own personal story. Not everybody will be able to do this or will feel comfortable doing it, but I do talk a lot about my own neurodivergence when I teach, and I kind of use that as a segue to suggest to students that they are welcome to talk to me about any access needs or anything that’s going well or not well for them in the course, so I’ll often just kind of model like, “Okay, here’s a little bit about me as a teacher and a learner. Here are some of my own access needs, and just the same way I’m sharing this information with you, if you would like to share similar information with me, it doesn’t have to be about disability or neurodivergence specifically, but anything about what you need to be successful learning in the course, if there are any kind of red zones of like things that you really don’t do well with or would like to avoid.” Another really good one that I try to offer my students is I ask them to tell me how they want to be communicated with and how they want to receive feedback on their assignments, and they’re welcome to change it if that changes. But for example, instead of waiting for someone to hand me an accommodation letter that says I need all communication and feedback in writing, I ask people, “Can you tell me how you would best receive this information?” And I try to provide it to them in that way. I think if you’re not kind of willing to do any kind of self-disclosure or model the sharing of your own access needs, but you are interested in the neurodiversity of your class, it could always be something that you say like, “I’ve been learning more about neurodiversity, either like I read a book or I went to a talk, and I’m really excited about learning more about all of you. If there’s anything that you want to share about like how you’ll learn best in this class or things that I should and shouldn’t do to support you, here’s how you can do that,” and I think that that makes a lot of sense to maybe separate a little bit from the disability accommodation statement that we usually have to put on the syllabus. Just because I never want to step on the toes of the disability services folks, they often, for good reason, have their own specific language that they like to use, and I don’t want to in any way kind of like complicate what it is that they offer, but to also talk more about what I can offer as the instructor, as in like being open to hearing, being open to flexibility, being open to modeling the sharing of access needs. That’s kind of how I approach it.

Rebecca: One of the things that sometimes can be really helpful, I think, for first-year students in particular is actually just describing what the process of going to the disability services office is because it’s different from what they experienced in high school. And so, there’s often such a giant learning curve, and it’s not obvious. Many of them might actually think that their accommodations that they had in high school are just going to kind of carry on, and that somehow that’s continuing in the way that it did through high school.

Sarah: Yeah, I think a lot of college faculty are unlikely to be familiar with this big transition unless they’ve dealt with it themselves or with their kids or someone that they know. But in the K to 12 system, it’s usually the district or the school that’s responsible for identifying students with disabilities and making sure that they’re receiving appropriate services and accommodations, and the responsibility completely shifts to the student themselves in higher education. So their institution is not responsible for identifying them or determining what they need. They have to do all of that advocacy work themselves, and so, of course, certainly they may bring documentation from their high school experience to help support the process, but it’s not a straight through line, I guess you could say, from K-12 to college, and I know that’s why a lot of people who work with neurodivergent young people focus a lot on this transition to independent self advocacy at the college level because it is a pretty major transition.

John: You describe teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm as defined in your book. What distinguishes this approach from other inclusive teaching practices?

Sarah: So I describe like my approach to neurodiversity as teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm. In some ways, to specifically identify my approach as relevant to all students and instructors rather than only about neurodivergent students, and so it’s worth just talking a little bit about what the neurodiversity paradigm is, and then kind of how I apply it to teaching. So the neurodiversity paradigm is kind of like a philosophical approach to neurodiversity that was developed by Nick Walker, who wrote the book Neuroqueer Heresies which is like a pretty foundational text about neurodiversity. But in my book, you can read a paraphrase of it. The basic idea is that human cognitive variation is overall a positive thing. That doesn’t mean that every form of variation is desired or positive for an individual person, but the fact that human cognition varies quite a bit is generally a positive, and that there isn’t a single best or right type of human mind, and there isn’t a single best way to think, behave, or communicate. That’s kind of how I paraphrase it. And so, the way that I try to apply this to teaching is to ask the question: What if we really committed to this in our teaching of saying that there isn’t a single best way to think, behave, or communicate, and what would that do to a lot of our assumptions about how we design courses, how we interact with students, the behavior that we expect of students, all of that sort of thing? So when I talk about teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm, there’s two other concepts that I think are really integral. One is the idea of tolerance for error. This is actually a feature of universal design, not UDL, but the architectural version of universal design. And tolerance for error is really about any kind of design that minimizes adverse consequences for mistakes. So one of the built environment things is that you can pull the lever up or push it down to open a door, or also like when you enter a password or something, it doesn’t automatically lock you out if you type it wrong one time. And I think that this is really useful in my kind of neurodiversity paradigm idea, it’s a really useful thing to apply to the classroom as well. A lot of my experience as a student, I would say, is of a lot of misunderstandings that ended up being viewed by my professor as a not meeting learning outcomes, or even laziness, or things like that. And I think that adopting the idea of tolerance for error might help bring a little bit more humility to misunderstandings and miscommunications that often occur between students and instructors, whether the people involved are neurodivergent or not. So I have a lot of examples of how tolerance for error could work in the book, and then my last concept that I think is really useful is that of access friction, which I’ve also written a lot about in some other venues, access friction is any situation in which there’s a conflict of access needs, and I think this is really relevant to teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm because, first of all, neurodivergence is a kind of concept about how some people’s cognition differs from what the assumed norm is. Not all neurodivergent people have the exact same needs or strengths or challenges, and far from it. Even within a group of all neurodivergent people, there’s probably going to be a conflict of needs that emerges in some way. I think a really common one that I see in the teaching environment is I have taught a lot of autistic students who prefer written communication and are much more successful with written communication. And then I’ve had some students with learning disabilities and specifically dyslexia who struggle a lot with written communication and greatly prefer verbal communication or visual aids or other media. And so those are two neurodivergent students who have contrasting access needs or preferences, or what would be ideal for them. So I also think a lot about how access friction can occur between students and instructors. Instructors themselves often have access needs or constraints on their time or their capacity, and this can also conflict with what students sometimes need. So I say overall, if I had to summarize, all of my teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm ideas are about negotiating difference and understanding between students and students, and students and instructors, rather than viewing neurodivergent students as a group that has challenges that need to be remedied. But it’s kind of a broader picture of recognizing that people do have really different needs and understandings, and that the negotiation of those is to be expected rather than this kind of shock to the system when it has to happen.

Rebecca: One of the things that I’m thinking about as you’re describing both kind of reducing access friction and also increasing error tolerance is what are some of the common ways that folks might approach teaching or teaching strategies that folks use that might be adapted a bit to reduce that friction or to allow for more error?

Sarah: So when we talk about what we’re up to, [LAUGHTER] definitely more about my new access friction work, just as a little preview. So especially for tolerance for error, I like to think a lot about trying to avoid situations in which either format or audience or any kind of one factor can tank the grade or the achievement of the learning outcomes, and there’s no kind of recourse for that. I think that, oftentimes, that can be done with design. I really appreciate approaches like TILT, transparency in learning and teaching. So intentional ways of making sure that the expectations are communicated, or that students have opportunity to clarify them as much as is needed or as is feasible. On the other hand, I think that tolerance for error can often also be achieved on the instructor’s side after the error. I have a really good example of this. I write about it in the book. So a story was told in a kind of research article about the experiences of autistic students, that a student submitted a lab report and they had kind of tried to meet all the expectations of the instructor, but ultimately they got not such a good grade, or they got marked down or feedback in some way that they had misunderstood the audience. So the instructor wanted them to write a scientific lab report to the audience of somebody who does not know anything about the experiment and is going to get all the information they need, and apparently maybe they hadn’t communicated that as clearly to the students. This autistic student who was the subject of the discussion in the article had basically written the lab report with no background information, and when asked, the student said, “Well, I think the most obvious audience of this is my instructor, and he assigned the lab, [LAUGHTER] so he knows all of the background information, and that doesn’t need to be repeated. And in certain spaces that I’ve seen this anecdote discussed, this was viewed as a deficit in perspective taking for the student, so to kind of incorrectly understand that the lab report should be written for a general audience, and to make the mistaken assumption that the audience is the instructor. I think this is an area where tolerance for error could be applied, to kind of say the student actually did recognize an audience quite correctly, in a sense. There was an overlay of the writing instruction here that the instructor did have a different idea of what they were hoping for, but to put it very bluntly, I don’t think anyone did anything wrong. And to suggest that this is going to have a very adverse consequence on the student’s grade, I think that’s like where I would try to apply tolerance for error. It was a difference of understanding that’s reasonable, maybe difficult to have avoided in the first place, and I would want to get away from the idea that that needs to be punished in grade form in some way. And, I don’t know, there’s a number of different responses I could make. If I were the instructor, I would probably go back to the idea of teaching in the neurodiversity paradigm, to just kind of sit and ponder. That’s not how I thought about it, and that’s not how I thought I communicated it. But I do see how they interpreted it, and what could be the positives in that? What could this student be bringing to the assignment that I didn’t anticipate? What strength did they demonstrate by interpreting it in this way, if any? And how do I carry that forward? The answer might be different for every instructor, and someone also might turn around and say, “Okay, I just have to make sure that this doesn’t happen again. I really need them to write for a general audience with appropriate background information.” But what do you do with that incident? Do you say, “Okay, that person wasn’t able to take perspective,” or do you say, “What did they demonstrate in terms of their understanding of the whole assignment.”

John: So transparency in expectations is really important. But when instructors are vague, they should allow students to interpret it in a reasonable way in that case.

Sarah: Right, yeah, that’s one way of putting it. And I’ve written a little bit about this on my blog. But if you are a neurodivergent instructor, I think that the whole concept of transparency, it can be a little bit tricky because one of the base experiences I think of being neurodivergent is that people often interpret what you say in a really different way than what you’re expecting and I’m often taking extra lengths to kind of explain specifically what I mean to other people and so I have less of an expectation, I guess, as an instructor that people will understand what I’m saying or what I want the first time, and I expect a lot of clarification. And I’ve also come to realize over time that people sometimes have completely other factors or information that are affecting their understanding that I don’t have access to, and I can’t change. This is an example that I think I wrote about in the book, but it kind of demonstrates this. I had said to students in a class where they had a discussion board assignment: you don’t need to write in the formal academic style, and you don’t need to use APA citation. That’s not the point of this assignment. The point is something else, to discuss or to offer your own opinion on the readings. But then, even after I had said this a lot of times, I saw some students were still doing it. They were still writing a formal introduction sentence. They were still doing parenthetical citations in the APA reference formatting. I kept thinking about it, and I eventually asked some of them, and I was like, “But did you hear or did you remember that I said you didn’t need to do that?” And they said, “Yeah, but all of our other professors do require it. So it was hard to imagine that you were serious about this, basically.” [LAUGHTER] And that happened with another assignment as well. I don’t remember exactly what it was, but I thought that through, and I said, “Well, they’re right about the fact that this institution does prioritize a certain kind of consistency about policies throughout different courses. This just happened to be one area where I didn’t do the same thing as their instructors, and maybe their prior experiences they had never had an instructor say you can choose what to do in some of these ways, and it felt like the most conservative thing to do to say, “Ah okay, I’ll just do it the way that the other instructors were doing it,” so I didn’t know that that’s how they were thinking about it. Obviously, no one was harmed in the course of this. [LAUGHTER] It’s not that big of a deal, but it’s just one illustration. I find it endlessly interesting to figure out, okay, how did you interpret that, and why? And that helps me update how I communicate in the future.

Rebecca: You provided a few different examples of what to do after something was misinterpreted or just differently interpreted. Can you talk a little bit about some of the proactive strategies instructors can do to put some structures in place that are friendly to a wide variety of audience members?

Sarah: So, if you do end up reading the book, you’ll find out that I kind of am not a big fan of saying, “Okay, well, there’s these clear strategies that are definitely going to work.” I tend to phrase things into the buckets of like an area to check. Like, here’s a certain phenomenon in the classroom where you might want to check out the design and what’s going on here a little bit more closely. And one of the models of that that I really like is the idea of a kairotic space, and Margaret Price introduced me to that term in her book, Mad at School. And chirotic is a way of saying something that is very dependent on time in a certain sense, because kairos is the like classical rhetorical concept of being at the right time, and she kind of defines kairotic spaces in the classroom as either things that are rapidly unfolding, or highly social, or high stakes, or potentially all at the same time, and I think that those types of activities are really good places to do further analysis of how they might be impacting neurodivergent students or groups that contain neurodivergent and neurotypical students. So any activity that is designed to be highly social or where the highly social element is considered a benefit of it, this may not work the same way for all students, including maybe some neurodivergent students. And it might be interesting to think about building in options for that kind of situation that is highly social. For example, if you’re imagining it will be fun for students to spontaneously meet with a group of their peers and to share about themselves, or share what they did over the weekend, or share where they come from, to kind of think about: okay, might there be a range of prompts that people can answer, might there be a range of formats in which they could answer? Could they share something in text form or not in a verbal form? Could people opt to do that in just a pair of two rather than a group of four or five? Could somebody opt to do that in a quieter space instead of in a space where everybody’s talking all at the same time. I think another area to check that’s somewhat similar is any kind of very rapidly unfolding activity where either something is timed, like there’s timers going off and cutting people off, or where people have a very limited amount of time to answer a question or do a task. The reason that I mention this in the context of neurodivergence specifically is that a lot of neurodivergent people process certain kinds of information at slower or sometimes faster speeds, depending on what it is. For example, like there’s a number of autistic people who process verbal information more slowly, and I think people with certain kinds of learning disabilities may also process some kinds of information more slowly, and so kind of building flexibility into how much time people have for something, whether they can have time at home to process the information that’s going to be needed within the class session, or transition it into a different format that works well for them. I think that’s really great, and then I think as well to consider whether some of these types of activities have to be as high stakes as you originally think. I call this sometimes highly layered activities where something is both highly social and rapidly unfolding and high stakes all at the same time, when it doesn’t necessarily have to be that way. So the idea of giving students experience with working as a team with other students, it doesn’t have to be 50% of their grade [LAUGHTER] or 30% of their grade to get that experience. Working collaboratively doesn’t have to be with four or five other people; it could be with one other person. And to kind of think like, how can you pull different levers to make something into more of a learning and practice experience than a high-stakes everything that’s hard all combined at the same time. I think that that could be an area to further investigate if you are teaching neurodivergent students or you’re interested in responding to neurodiversity more in your practice. So I know that’s not like a checklist, but a checklist perspective doesn’t align with how I think so much. So those are just like some areas that I would investigate further.

John: So there are some areas where things that work well for some students won’t work as well for other students, and I think what you’re saying is that we can’t just come up with these hard and fixed rules that’ll work for every group of students. We have to somehow negotiate these things. But one of the areas where there’s often some challenges for students that are neurodiverse is when classroom participation is part of the grade in some way, because some students are much more comfortable with some forms of classroom participation than others. What sort of strategies might work to provide a balance that would work for most of the students in terms of class participation?

Sarah: So I’m a big fan of offering multiple options for participation. I think that a reasonable person could differ from me in saying I want students to participate in certain ways, at least some of the time. I generally don’t mind if students exclusively participate via text or discussion board and if they don’t speak in class, some people do, and I think that it’s reasonable to say, okay, I want to build an environment in which people have structured on ramps, I call them, to participating in class verbally. But generally speaking, to say there’s multiple ways to participate, and those can be chosen from to a certain extent is a really great start, I think as well, beyond the kind of like counting up how many times people participate. You mentioned the idea of like faculty perceptions of student class participation. It may be interesting for faculty to expand what they perceive as successful class participation, and one category I hear a lot about when people talk about their neurodivergent students is actually what they refer to as quote too much participation versus not enough. It’s a pretty common story that I’ll hear, someone will say, “There’s a neurodivergent student in my class, and they raise their hand all the time, and I think that actually maybe there’s other students who would like to participate, but maybe they’re not taking the opportunity because this person talks a lot.” And I kind of go back to the neurodiversity paradigm ideas again as well, which is okay, like first, can we start by saying what strengths is this person demonstrating? What are they offering? Somebody told me at first. I was thinking about how to get this person to stop raising their hand, but then I realized I go to sleep at night wishing my students would participate more [LAUGHTER] and that they would be as passionate and engaged. So I think I have to start from there. If the balance of who’s speaking in my class isn’t quite working, to not start from the perspective of I don’t like how much this person is participating, but I’m really glad that they’re so enthusiastic, and I’m grateful for their presence. So now I want to think about how I can encourage the participation of everybody in the class. Maybe think about is there a way that I want to balance the voices that are present, the modality of the participation, all those sorts of things. I am also a big fan of creating opportunities to record and get out a lot of questions. So I am probably one of those people who participates like a little bit too much [LAUGHTER] sometimes. So like the idea of having a question parking lot so you can put as many questions in here as you want, and as the instructor, I will get to as many as I can. Maybe I’ll review and summarize them and respond to a couple at once, and above all, to talk explicitly about what you’re doing as a facilitator. Say, I’m trying to encourage as many people to participate in the following ways. I’m going to be facilitating the conversation by moving on from certain points because I have areas of content I want to cover. But just kind of externalizing that, I think, is also really great.

Rebecca: It sounds to me like a lot of the strategies that fit into this neurodiversity-informed teaching approach could be really beneficial to all students. Is that the idea?

Sarah: Yeah, I think so. I think part of the way that I frame everything is that neurodiversity includes everybody, so it doesn’t include just neurodivergent people, and so a lot of the strategies that I introduce are aimed, I would say, a little bit less at things that specifically target neurodivergent students and more about coexistence and negotiation between large diverse groups of people. And that is not to suggest that there aren’t wonderful resources for supporting neurodivergent students. I think you’ve actually had some people on the podcast who have written really wonderfully about that. Specifically, Jennifer Pusateri just had a new book come out supporting neurodivergent students. Karen Costa’s book about ADHD learners was really great. There’s a couple books I have on my bookshelf about supporting autistic college students. Those are all really, really great. I think the approach I wanted to take a little bit more here was okay, but it’s never just one neurodivergent student or a group of all people with the same needs. It’s a pretty complex mix of people, including the instructor, and so that’s kind of the approach that I take more in the book.

Rebecca: I do think that’s something that we hear from faculty a lot is like, how do I balance all these like really different needs? So it’s certainly a resource that I think people are hungry for.

Sarah: Okay, that’s great to hear.

John: You’ve already hinted at this a little bit, but could you tell us about what’s next?

Sarah: So, as I hinted at earlier, I’m really interested in the concept of access friction, which is the conflict between different sets of access needs you could say. So, I’m working on a whole new book project just about access friction, and it will hopefully be published with the same press in the same series. So that’s exciting. And in that book, I’m really going to kind of explore and theorize and research instances of access friction in the classroom, a focus on higher ed pedagogy, and really think about the specific steps we can take to balance different needs in the classroom. So I’ll be answering or hoping to answer all sorts of interesting questions, such as: Is there an inclusive strategy or set of them that truly does include everybody? And even taking a little bit more of a curious and critical perspective on the idea of inclusive teaching strategies themselves, I think that what I’m hoping to do with further research on access friction is, in some ways, just give voice and give name to a phenomenon that I know that a lot of people have experienced [LAUGHTER] some time in their teaching journey, but not really knowing exactly what to do with. And I’m like really happy to be working more deeply on that topic, and I guess I should also say it’s very connected to neurodiversity for me because of the fact that neurodiversity and neurodivergence refers to a coalition of people, kind of a group of people who may share that their cognition differs a little bit or a lot from social norms or expectations of society, but not that everybody has the same needs.[LAUGHTER] And just going back to my interest in neurodiversity history, some of the first events that the autistic community put together-one was called Autreat, like retreat,[LAUGHTER] but autistics for retreat. So you can look back at some of the writings about that and just see some of these advocates noting that even in a retreat that was only for autistic people, they experienced significant disagreement and friction over how it should be run, how it could be accessible to all people, and so this has been a through line of Classroom Mindscapes, and so I’m hoping to just kind of expand on that a little bit more. And my other thing that’s next, I’ve been currently both leading and also just participating in a lot of discussion about instructor interest in lower tech teaching or taking technology away from classroom interactions, probably spurred by increasing AI use and penetration [LAUGHTER] of the whole teaching community. And so I’ve been really interested in how that can align with accessibility commitments and interest in accessibility.

John: As we were going through this, I was noting this is one of the few podcasts we have where AI did not come up right until then. [LAUGHTER]

Sarah: Well I had to get in in. Yeah.

John: But it did, yeah.

Rebecca: It always does. These sound like some really great projects. I’m looking forward to seeing where they lead.

Sarah: Yeah, thank you.

John: I’m looking forward to getting my copy of your book, which should be coming out later this month, and also looking forward to future conversations about access friction and other things. And in general, that’s just an incredibly good book series for people in higher ed.

Rebecca: Thank you so much for joining us.

Sarah: Yeah, thank you so much for the invitation. I really enjoyed meeting and talking with both of you.

John: Thank you.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

[MUSIC]

449. Student Access and Earnings

The “One Big, Beautiful Bill” contains a provision eliminating federal loan availability for programs in which past graduates had early career earnings that fall below a designated threshold. In this episode, Debbie Furlong joins us to discuss the statistical measures used to determine federal loan eligibility.

Debbie has served for over 30 years doing applied higher education policy analysis at public comprehensive universities, most recently as the Director of Institutional Research at SUNY Oswego. Prior to her arrival at Oswego, she worked and taught at the University of Wisconsin at Green Bay, St. Norbert College in Wisconsin, and the American University in Washington, DC, where she had completed her PhD degree in international relations.

Show Notes

Transcript

John: The “One Big, Beautiful Bill” contains a provision eliminating federal loan availability for programs in which past graduates had early career earnings that fall below a designated threshold. In this episode, we explore the statistical measures used to determine federal loan eligibility.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

Rebecca: Our guest today is Debbie Furlong. She has served for over 30 years doing applied higher education policy analysis at public comprehensive universities, most recently as the Director of Institutional Research at SUNY Oswego. Prior to her arrival at Oswego, she worked and taught at the University of Wisconsin at Green Bay, St. Norbert College in Wisconsin, and the American University in Washington, DC, where she had completed her PhD degree in international relations. Welcome, Debbie.

Debbie: Hi.

John: Thanks for joining us. Today’s teas are:… Debbie, are you drinking any tea today?

Debbie: I am waiting for my tea to cool off. It’s a decaffeinated green tea, because it’s too late in the day for me to have any caffeine.

Rebecca: Green tea is a nice choice at this time of day. I have Blue Sapphire today.

John: Back to an old standby, and I have ginger peach green tea today.

Debbie: I’ve had a ginger peach tea. It’s some of my favorite flavors.

John: It’s one of mine too. This is a Republic of Tea variant. Rebecca particularly likes flavored teas.

Rebecca: It always smells good. [LAUGHTER]

Debbie: Yes, it does.

Rebecca: We’ve invited you here today to discuss the growing focus by the federal government on using earnings data on students who evaluate the success of college programs. The One Big Beautiful Bill Act prohibits universities from awarding federal loans to students in programs where its former students have earned low wages. Can you tell us a bit about how we got to this point?

Debbie: Yes, it’s been a long trip down. Some might say the government has been providing post-enrollment earnings data for several years now through a tool called a scorecard. Assessing the quality and value of a college degree in terms of students’ earnings has been growing in popularity for a long time. Increasingly, we’ve all talked in higher ed about people viewing their degree in terms of what it’s done for me as a private good, as opposed to focusing more on the public good of education. We can see data where this trend has been growing for 50 years. I think that trend was really exacerbated when public universities, when states started having to trim public funding, and parents and families were bearing more and more of the cost, and when the price, the stated prices were going up, up, up, this trend became even more predominant. Universities really have not helped at this, because, like, our marketing areas for recruiting have really leaned into the job placement as something that needs to be touted as an important thing, so we’re all sort of involved in telling students they should pay attention to how much they’re going to earn. I think the original interest of the federal government – I’m just speculating… based on timing and the administration that was in play at the time we first got the scorecard… I think the original interest was sort of a consumer protection kind of position. We had had an explosion of for-profit schools that really had some very serious problems. Students were not completing the degrees, and even when they were, they were unable to earn enough to pay back their loans, and the loan default rates were going up for these schools. So it was like, “Well, let’s protect the consumers,” so about 10 years ago, when Obama was actually still in, the Department of Ed launched the College Scorecard, and the College Scorecard was really the first time that families and students could look at a university’s profile and see: this is the graduation rate, this is how much it cost, this is what percent of students get loans, and here’s the average income a certain number of years after graduation. And here’s the percent of students that are paying back loans, so, bringing it all together. Where we’re at right now, the new state that we’re in right now is the Department of Ed looking and saying, “Gosh, we have all this data. Let’s begin using it to stop supporting programs where students are not earning enough money. Since we have all the data, we should protect not just the consumer, but protect the taxpayer. The taxpayers shouldn’t be asked to pay through Pell grants and through loans for programs where students aren’t even able to earn as much as they could earn if they went and got a high school degree.” That’s how we got where we are, and that’s where we’re at. I hope you can hear some of the passion of my voice about this stuff. [LAUGHTER] I really think faculty and staff need to understand where the data come from and understand how we’re all in this together, and to feel confident to go and explore and learn on their own.

John: So, this started off as something designed to protect consumers, but it’s moved on to something a little bit bigger, and because of that, it’s become increasingly important to understand the data, and you spent a fair amount of time researching the data and how it’s measured, and you’ve raised some concerns with it. Could you talk a little bit about the primary sources of data first?,

Debbie: Yeah, there’s two really big national data sets. One is from the Department of Education, and one is provided by a group called the Carnegie Classification, which is a branch of the Carnegie Foundation, which is a nonprofit. The Carnegie Foundation has teamed up with the American Council on Education, ACE, which is a big nonprofit player in the higher ed sphere. Both of these organizations are providing data that is publicly accessible and downloadable, and they both have a website search engine that sits on top that enables you to look up one school or to compare a few schools, but the data that’s running those engines is fully accessible. So this winter I was bored, and I got in, and I started playing. It’s like I just really want to learn how they’re going to do all this, and what does this stuff all mean. So the College Scorecard is the most important resource. Like I said earlier, the Obama administration really launched the scorecard, and this was the first time that consumers could see, for one institution, all the stuff about debt and debt repayment and post-enrollment earnings, and they could see those metrics right next to the data about the tuition and the costs. Department of Ed could not have done this without technology advancing to the point that we could really wrap our minds around really truly big data sets. This downloadable data set I just referred to has over 3500 variables, so it’s not for the faint at heart. In order to measure graduates’ earnings, or the earnings of formerly enrolled students, because both groups are looked at. In order to do that, you got to have two things: you have to have tax records that indicate was the person employed, were they employed full time, and what was their income, their earnings, and you have to have something with a matching field that says what school did this student go to, did they graduate, and if they graduated, what field? No single university has this. So, the way this works is the Department of Ed has the student identity information from its loan and grant recipients, and all the earnings data is only measured for students who have taken out federal financial aid, either through a loan or by getting a Pell Grant. So, the Department of Ed has these files that have individual identification and information about whether the student graduated and what field. They send these files over to the Treasury Department. The Treasury Department does a merge and match with their records and sends the information back to the Department of Ed. As a little sidebar, we’re going to be talking in more and more depth today about this, and the fact that we’re limited to just looking at loan and grant recipients is a significant limitation. The sidebar I’ll drop in right now is I am surprised the Department of Education has not yet asked all of us to provide full identification records for all of our enrolled students. The reason I’m surprised they haven’t yet done this, there’s two things, [LAUGHTER] the first one is the Department of Ed did ask for student identified records earlier this winter when they started asking for information about access, information so that they could make sure that students who are black or low income were not being admitted when they had lower test scores and high school grades. The data file that the Department of Ed requested this winter is student identified, so they’ve gotten over their concern about privacy issues. [LAUGHTER] The second reason I’m surprised is they’ve been asking states to provide voter record identification, so I think it’s only a matter of time. The other reason, there is another organization out there that’s not really related to this topic we’re talking about, the National Student Loan Clearinghouse, or National Student Clearinghouse. The NSC has student-identified data, and I don’t see how the Department of Ed is going to feel too happy knowing somebody else has it and they don’t have it. So, I think it’s only a matter of time before that little limitation goes away. So, the Department of Ed sends these files over to Treasury, they get back the earnings data. The second data set out there has used the Scorecard file, and this other data set is the . I’m going to be referring to this as access and earnings, or more just Carnegie, the Carnegie framework. The Carnegie framework about access and earnings was released about a year ago, but it was in development for quite a bit longer. Carnegie’s real contribution that’s relevant for what we’re talking about today is they began trying to deal with the fact that in the scorecard the only earnings that people were getting compared to were national, and more recently, statewide data, and Carnegie’s framework argues that earnings for a school’s students should be compared to the earnings of high school graduates in the geographic areas where those students come from, not necessarily to the whole nation, and not necessarily even just to the state where the school is located. This issue about adjusting the earnings to reflect regional differences in incomes is definitely confounding the Department of Ed right now. The OBBBA is in negotiation. There is a negotiated rule making going on right now, and one of the last things that the Department of Ed is trying to figure out how to deal with before they roll out this framework, where if your program’s earnings are too low, you can’t get loans. The last issue they are mucking with is the regional differences in earnings, and I don’t know how they’re going to do it. The Carnegie folks did it one way and sort of got the ball rolling. Carnegie’s real contribution here, I think, is showing how incredibly difficult this is going to be. We’ll have to see, we’ll have to see how they do it, and it may take a few years before they really figure out how to most appropriately set a benchmark for earnings for every program in every school.

John: So, are you saying that the earnings of people in rural Alabama might be different than Manhattan? [LAUGHTER] Who would have thought?

Debbie: They are. Yes.

John: Among the other problems there that you’ve noted is that there’s a fair amount of sample selection in the sample that they’re working with, and you’ve already referred to one aspect of that. Could you talk a little bit more about that, and how that might affect the validity of the earnings measures?

Debbie: Yeah, yeah, so what John just referred to is the fact that only students who get federal financial aid are currently included, and for many of us that doesn’t seem like very much of a limitation, because so many of our students have to get loans and a huge percent of students get Pell grants, but there are a bunch of schools out there where those percentages are really, really small, and I went and I looked up Harvard’s data, just because everybody knows Harvard, you know, Harvard, Harvard. And I went and looked at Harvard because I anticipated Harvard students would not need to rely a lot on federal aid, not because I think Harvard students are rich or poor, I don’t particularly know, but Harvard is very, very wealthy, and they’re able to provide a lot of institutional aid, which keeps those students out of this federal tracking, tying together with your Treasury data. So I looked up Harvard. In a recent year, 20% of their students got Pell grants, and 4% of their students took out loans. So by the time that cohort gets through the system, only a quarter of the students would have their wages reflected in these median wages. I don’t really know what this is going to mean. Is this good? Is it bad? It makes me feel uncomfortable about the validity of the data. Another thing that I know with this coverage, I have been watching that the percent of students in the United States agreeing to take out loans fell after COVID and did not rebound. I think this past year they have started rebounding a little bit. What this means is that the coverage overall, nationally, school after school after school, this coverage rate is going to be going down for the next several years. So, this is another reason why I am expecting the Department of Ed to be knocking on everyone’s doors very soon, saying: “The gig is up. We want a student-identified file. We want to know everyone who’s enrolled every semester. Here’s the portal. Drop the data.” Another issue that kind of deals with coverage that gets very confusing has to do with the timing, and this is kind of devastating to me, is a validity issue. And what I mean by timing is, how long do you wait after a student has left the institution, or after a student has graduated. How long do you wait before you go and grab their earnings data? Okay, so timing issues can be very confusing, and what I would really encourage anybody who’s paying attention to this stuff, don’t try to sink into your mind exactly how these things are measured. When you go to one of the websites, look for the information notes, they will tell you exactly what they’re measuring. Carnegie’s Access and Earnings framework originally relied on a measure… they looked at students’ earnings eight years after the student initially enrolled, and there are reasons why they made that choice. One of the things that higher ed has been deeply criticized about is the poor retention of students after the first year, and there’s a huge amount of tax money that goes to students who are at the institution for one year, and then they never really do anything with that education. So looking at students based on where they started is not stupid, but it is kind of misleading. I think when people say, “Oh, here’s Cornell’s earnings data,” I think people assume that’s the earnings data of students who graduated from Cornell [LAUGHTER] or from whatever school, and the current version of the scorecard has flipped over and is relying almost exclusively on earnings data measured four years after the student graduated. So the cohorts are now measuring students who actually completed the degree, which is probably more valid for what people actually think they’re looking at, and they give students four years, so now it’s like, okay, four years… is four years long enough to get a valid measure of a student’s earnings potential? I think this is a huge limitation. Many of the highest earning fields, and I’m thinking like medicine and law, those are going to be either really hard or downright impossible for a student to complete the whole thing and be out and earning. So a lot of fields where students go on to complete masters and doctorates, those students are ultimately going to be the highest earners, but they’re not going to be earning that stuff four years out, so I was thinking about, like, where I was four years after my undergraduate degree. I had gotten my first full-time job, but it was just a job to pay the bills, because I was working on a PhD. So, was I earning more than a high school student? Maybe. I don’t know. I was mostly a graduate assistant, getting paid a graduate fellowship. Even fields where students don’t go on for advanced degrees, I think that there’s a lot of research that indicates people who complete a baccalaureate degree will ultimately have higher lifetime earnings, even if they don’t get an advanced degree. We know this lifetime earning data exists, so is four years long enough to predict the lifetime earnings of a particular person in a particular field of study from a particular university? I think it’s a big validity question. The last thing that I wanted to mention is this timing, all this stuff about the validity of the timing of when the data are grabbed, it’s grabbing data right smack at an important time for young families that are deciding to have kids. I looked up before coming today, because I knew I wanted to make this point, because I think it’s important, the average age for women in the United States who have had children at this time, the average age of when they had their first baby was 26 that’s just right in this four years… you graduate when you’re 21 or 22 So I mentioned this because it’s very common for young families, for either the husband or the wife, the mom or the dad, or one parent, to back off a little bit from working full time or working at the high pressure job. So there’s a lot of problems with the data.

John: Going back to what’s referred to as the Mincer equation, which was first estimated back in the early 1970s. economists have been estimating the overtaking age, the age at which the earnings of college graduates overtake the earnings of high school graduates with equivalent demographic and ability characteristics, and back then was about seven years after graduation. More recent studies suggest that it varies a fair amount by discipline and by occupation, but it’s generally between six and eight years after graduation from college, which means on average the fact that people are earning more than high school graduates puts them way above where you would expect them to be had they not gone to college, or people with similar characteristics would receive had they not gone to college. And so it’s really troubling that they came up with a metric that’s so evidence-free, basically.

Debbie: Yes, [LAUGHTER] problematic.

John: And also, you mentioned law school graduates, so they might be a year out of law school, but some of the people who come out of law school are going to be working with large firms for ridiculously low pay, and those are the people who are going to have the highest rate of growth of earnings. Other people will start their own practice and will have higher starting salaries than those who go for those large law firms, at least in terms of hourly wages, they’ll be paid a lot less, but they will end up with a slower rate of growth of earnings, and there’s another classic economic study back during this period on on-the-job training and the fine structure of earnings, which notes that holding other things constant, people in the same occupation with lower starting salaries tend to have higher rates of earning growth over time, because part of what they’re picking up on the job are some skills that will improve their productivity, and they’re essentially accepting lower wages during those times in return for the increase in training or human capital development they get on the job, which is certainly true in medical school, because then they’re starting their residencies, where they’re paid again ridiculously low amounts, but they end up with much higher earnings just a few years later.

Rebecca: I knew John would be passionate. [LAUGHTER]

Debbie: Yes. And everything he said is true today, the research is still valid and important.

Rebecca: One of the other things that you mentioned is those regional variations that Carnegie was developing, or kind of initiated. Can you talk a little bit about these regional variations, and like, what does their framework mean? How did they do it? How maybe should they do it? [LAUGHTER]

Debbie: Yeah, so like I said, when they first put the scorecard out, my perception is that was kind of a consumer protection thing, like here’s the tuition, here’s the percent of students who have loans, here’s the percent of students who have paid back their loans, and here’s the average amount that their graduates earn, without judging whether or not that average was adequate or met a benchmark. Well, those days are behind us. The OBBBA wants to establish this benchmark of acceptable earnings, and the negotiation is moving forward. It seems very clear that they’re going to be using this high school degree population as the benchmark, but obviously people earn different wages based on different regions and different wages based on whether or not you’re in an urban area or a rural area. So the Carnegie framework is the first place I’ve seen where they tried to take this on. So let me tell you how they did it. A little segue, when Carnegie adjusted for regional variation, they have also adjusted for variances based on race and ethnicity. Carnegie’s argument was, if a student goes to a certain university, when they get done, that student should earn as much as high school graduates matched by the racial and ethnic distribution of the service area of that university and weighted to reflect the earnings differences of different racial groups, so they did this racial weighting. I’m not going to talk too much about that, because the OBBBA, the language I have seen, specifically says that the earnings benchmark cannot be adjusted for race. They want a race-neutral approach, just like they want race-neutral admissions. This is part of what we’re going through and working on with the Department of Ed right now. So let me talk about how they do the regional stuff. What Carnegie looked at, they said, “Okay, let’s look at where the entering class of a university is coming from.” The Department of Ed, for 20 or 30 years, has collected this data. It’s called a migration file. In the migration file every second fall, you’re not required to submit migration data every year… I don’t know why not… but in the file, the institutional researchers at the university have to go in and look and say, “Okay, how many people are in my freshman class, and where did they come from? How many of them came from New York State. How many of them came from Pennsylvania?” And the file goes through all of the states, so that data exists in IPEDS. IPEDS is the federal government’s collection of data about colleges and universities, and it’s a massive data set. So Carnegie said, “Well, gosh, since IPEDS has this migration data, let’s use that to figure out this concept of a service area.” What is the service region of this university? So, if a university has 90% of its students are coming from New York and 10% are coming from Pennsylvania, its earnings should be similar to the high school graduates of New York, weighted a little bit to reflect the fact that people from Pennsylvania have lower earnings. Now, so a 90%, 10%. In the Carnegie framework, it takes the top three states, so it says, okay, school X. If you had 50% of your students from one state and 40% from a second state and 5% from a third state, your earnings benchmark will be the weighted average of those elements, and then the remainder, the last little bit, we’ll just use the national data. This sounds kind of reasonable, I guess. Carnegie was very careful developing this. They got feedback, they got pushback from the two year schools saying, “Well, wait a minute, everyone at our university comes from one state, but they don’t come from all over the state, they all come from my county, or these two or three counties, because we have a lot of two-year schools out in rural areas.” This is a really serious issue, because the state earnings levels are very influenced by what’s happening in the big cities, and rural incomes tend to be much lower than urban incomes. So, Carnegie said, “Well, this is a reasonable complaint, so we’re going to back off, and we’re not going to use your state, where you have most people from. We’re going to use this core-based statistical area to gather your data.” There are a couple of other problems before we really get into the CBSA, and what that is. There are a couple of other things about relying just on the migration data that concerned me. My professional background was all in public comprehensive universities, and every place I ever worked had a huge pool of students who transferred into my universities, so I know transfer students may or may not be accurately reflected in this migration data in the schools where I’ve worked. In the systems where I’ve worked transfer students had a very different geographic distribution than new freshmen, and I think this is true for a lot of public comprehensive universities that the freshman class tends to come from all over the state much more, but the transfer students tend to be students who started at a nearby community college, and now they are your own community students, so that migration data that we’re using may not really be a great fit. The other thing that’s problematic is we are just assuming that the geographic distribution of graduates is the same as the geographic distribution of new entering freshmen. It may be, it may not be, and it may or may not matter, but these kinds of assumptions that are baked into the method, I think, cause people to feel a sense of discomfort about really feeling confident that the data really are measuring what we think they’re measuring,

Rebecca: So Debbie, I have another question. It seems like most of the data that you’re talking about is really focused on the states, so not necessarily international students and entirely undergraduates.

Debbie: Yes, and no, all of the earnings data is for US citizens only, and I will remind you that in order to have a student’s earnings get studied, they have to have gotten federal financial aid. International students are not eligible for Pell grants and for federal loans. So even if a former international student got OPT training and landed a job and became naturalized, we would have no way of knowing… the Department of Ed would have no way of knowing to tell the Treasury Department, “send me that person’s salary and earning data.” So universities that have huge international student bodies, especially if they’re doing really well, and supplying really fabulous students into high-need areas here in the United States. All of that is just kind of a loss. Now, your other question, like “Debbie, all you’re doing is talking about undergrad, undergrad, undergrad. What about graduate students?” The research that I really focused on this winter was about this Carnegie Access and Earnings framework, which is exclusively about the undergraduate experience. The scorecard data does include earnings data for graduate students, and the OBB BA work going on right now is also going to be relevant for graduate students. Graduate students are eligible to get federal loans in certain circumstances, and those loans will be cut off if a student gets a graduate degree from a school where their program is not earning on average as much as baccalaureate earners in whatever state or region the OBBA decides to look at, so it’s the same kind of framework, notched up one level.

Rebecca: The other thing that I was curious about is the data that you were talking about, is where students are coming from initially, which may not be where they are working.

Debbie: Yeah.

Rebecca: Am I right about that? [LAUGHTER]

Debbie: Oh, yeah. [LAUGHTER] And I’ve got a bunch of notes about this thing, and I definitely wanted to hit this. So you’re jumping into something that I already also agree is really a problem. Two issues: do students go back to where they came from? No. The other thing that’s really problematic, I think, is that the earnings data are all aggregated on the basis of what the student studied, not what they’re actually doing. So, I was thinking in my head, like examples, I know your field is art and design, design arts. Someone who studies design arts and graduates with an art degree and goes and does marketing in New York City is going to have a very different earnings experience than someone who completes an art degree at the same school and stays in that local area and runs art programs for the YMCA. These are both wonderful jobs, both jobs that would require an art degree to be really effective, but they’re incredibly different fields. I mean, one is marketing and the other one is social services, and that’s not accounted for. So, what a person’s actually doing with their degree is not part of the mix.

John: You talked a little bit about these core-based regions that are used for measuring geographic effects. What are they, and could you tell us a bit more about how they’re defined, and whether there’s some problems with the use of those.

Debbie: Yeah, the two year schools kind of pushed back and said statewide data doesn’t make any sense for us. So the Carnegie Foundation said, “Okay, the regional adjustment for two-year schools, we should use the data from the closest geographic region to their service area.” The Census Bureau has these geographic entities called core-based statistical areas. A CBSA is a geographic area that contains a large urban center, and then the surrounding areas that are kind of integrated economically with that urban center. Like, I live in Oswego, New York, which is about 30 miles north of Syracuse. I’m in the Syracuse CBSA, which makes perfect sense. There’s so much stuff that we depend on Syracuse for, and people go back and forth there all the time. So, Carnegie said, “Okay, let’s use core-based statistical areas for the two-year schools, and let’s also use them for these public regional universities.” There’s this category of universities called a regional public university, or an RPU, which is most public universities that are not focused on research. So, in New York, Stony Brook, and Albany and SUNY Buffalo, those are all research-focused institutions, they’re not RPUs. Almost all of the other four-year public universities in New York are considered RPUs. So, Carnegie said, “Well, they’re called regional, they must be serving their region. Let’s do all of our benchmarking for them based on the core-based statistical area.” Well, I really dug into this with my research, because the truth of the matter is most of these regional public universities are not recruiting heavily from our own regions. At most, RPUs would have maybe 20 to 30% of the students from their region. We’re all recruiting heavily in the big urban areas, because that’s where the students are. This is the whole piece of this enrollment cliff. Not only is certain states and regions losing students, but the students who are left are in the cities, and if we want to maintain universities out in the smaller communities, we’ve got to move the students out into these smaller communities. So I did some actual sensitivity analysis to see, does it matter? Does it impact the outcomes for these RPUs in the Carnegie world if you change from looking at them through a core-based statistical area lens, or using just their regular state lens?” And there’s a pretty big impact. It really can make kind of a big difference. One of the other things I looked at, just to sort of confirm for myself that this is kind of questionable, is I was thinking all these RPUs have… not all of them, but many of them… have huge dormitories, [LAUGHTER] and we have the ability to house huge percentages of our student bodies. So, while most two-year schools don’t have dorms, and the students have to come from right there in that community, that is just not true for the RPUs. I did a lot of work looking at the impact of this flip between CBSA and state data on the metrics measuring diversity. I didn’t do as much looking at the income piece, but it’s definitely a problem. Most RPUs are not getting the bulk of their students from their CBSA, and yet their benchmark salary is being determined, in very large matter, by the incomes in that CBSA. Is this good? Is it bad? I don’t know. It is a validity question, because we’re measuring something, thinking it means one thing when it really might not.

Rebecca: One of the other metrics that you were talking about is how the Department of Ed is comparing to median salaries of high school graduates. Can you talk a little bit about how they’re doing that, and what concerns you might have around that, in terms of like how they’re benchmarking which programs get loans.

Debbie: I’ve been speaking mostly about how the Carnegie made adjustments in order to accommodate regional variation. I want to make it clear at this point that the Carnegie framework did not consider field of study, which is where I think you were kind of starting to head, Rebecca, because it’s the field of study that the Department of Ed wants to use to cut loans off. They are not suggesting cutting off loans and grants to entire universities, although that is a possibility if a university has a really large proportion of its programs failing to meet the benchmark, then they could talk. I don’t know. But it really is this program level data. So, my understanding is that the Department of Ed, right now, is trying to figure out how to do some regional salary adjustments that may or may not look like how Carnegie did it, but the OBBBA data set is going to be doing these regional adjustments on salaries aggregated to reflect program of study, so you can go in right now to the scorecard, and you can go into fields of study, and for fields of study that have an adequate number of graduates, you can see what is the median earning for those graduates from that program four years later. On the same page, it has a little bar that says here is the average earnings of high school students in the United States at this point in time, and then there’s a bar right beneath that that said, and here’s the earnings for this school’s state. So right now OBBBA would be leaning on a data set, or the scorecard is saying here’s the field of study, but everybody gets matched up to the same national high school graduate earning data, or state high school earning data, and what I mean by high school earning data, it’s earnings of people who are employed full time in that year whose highest degree is a high school diploma.

Rebecca: So basically the numbers are comparing someone who studied this particular topic with anyone who’s in any job with a high school degree [LAUGHTER] in any field. [LAUGHTER]

Debbie: Yes, yes, and you know something that I haven’t really thought too much about, but it’s one of those things that I think I think about it in the middle of the night. The federal government right now is spending a lot of time and effort to make more federal funding available for short- term academic programs, which is like technical training. I feel like the federal government is working hard to improve the salary and earnings [LAUGHTER] of people with a high school degree, you go and get a certificate in a particular field, which is great, and I completely support this, but these high school earnings figures, I think, are going to be coming up. If the federal government is successful, the benchmark that they’re going to be comparing the four-year schools to is going to be going up more. I’m not really sure that’s going to happen, because I think earnings are really more a reflection of the labor market than they are a reflection, particularly of field of study and variances between different programs. Another problem, though, that I really want to talk about, and I hope this doesn’t give you heebie jeebies, Rebecca, because I know you’re more of a qualitative person and less of a quantitative person, but all of this benchmarking is going to be made based on comparing median earnings of a group of people to median earnings of a larger group, the high school comparison, so we really have to ask the question, we hot to dig back and think, okay, what is a median, or even what is an average, and what does it mean to enact a policy where we treat an entire group of people in a particular way based on the average of a group that that person happens to be a member of. This is a bigger problem, really, for Carnegie, because they were putting people in groups left and right, but this is a problem. This fact that the median is not necessarily particularly representative, because there are people who have much higher salaries and people who have much lower salaries. So, how fair is it to treat everybody in a program one way because of a median value, there’s two real issues here. The first is the issue of the cutoff value. I’m trying to think of a really good example to illustrate the cutoff value problem. In higher education, it’s very common for universities to say “everybody with a high school GPA of 3.5 and above is automatically admitted, directly admitted.” The cutoff problem is that there’s going to be a lot of people who have a 3.49 who have very, very good reasons for arguing that their 3.49 justifies their admission to this university to much greater extent than some other people that have a 3.5. Maybe that person went to a very exclusive, difficult high school, maybe the person began high school speaking a foreign language, maybe the person had trauma in their last year, all that stuff, and we all know colleges have these vast mechanisms for making exceptions that are required because of the cutoff value problem. Whenever you’re going to take a quantitative element and put people in groups, you’re going to have a cutoff problem. It’s like for the OBBBA, the cutoff problem is there’s going to be programs where the median high school salary is only $1 or two or three, it’s very, very close to the median for this group of students, for whatever reason. And that median could be low for a lot of reasons, maybe it’s low because that program has a bunch of students in grad school, maybe it’s low because those people all decided to take a mission year and they’re just now starting their careers. Whatever it is, you’re going to have people really close to the cutoff value. The second numeric problem, you have to think back when you were in stats class and they made you learn all about the standard deviation and the variance around the midpoint, this is a huge, huge problem. So, just to illustrate this, if you think about a couple of universities, and you think about business school graduates, you could have one university where the average business school grad earns 50,000 and another one where the average earns 40,000 so there’s a $10,000 difference between those two. Well, I can guarantee you, if you looked at either one of those, at the 40,000 you would find a lot of students earning over 50 and even over 60,000 and you would find lots of students earning 30,000 and below. The definition of a median is that half the people are above and half the people are below. There’s been a lot of research in higher education, specifically the research I’m most familiar with was done by the National Survey of Student Engagement, the NSSE. About 30 years ago, the NSSE started collecting student experience data, and very quickly they started putting out data showing that the variance of student experiences within any single school is vastly greater than the variance of student experiences from one school to another. This is just by definition, this has to be true in this earnings data. S o we’re very likely going to be eliminating programs that could have served students where we would have predicted that at least half of those students would have done just fine in the earnings metric. Now the scorecard has a ton of data about this variance measures. For every single program, they show the standard deviation, they provide a mean, they provide a median, and they provide the quartile values at the third quartile and the first, so that you can measure and see how wide is the gap within which 50% of students fall. The fact that they’re providing all this variance data tells me the people at the Department of Ed deeply understand the importance of variance, but deeply understanding it mathematically doesn’t explain to me how they’re going to accommodate for the variance when they start deciding which programs get cut off, because they have not talked about that at all. So there’s a lot of stuff really coming out here, [LAUGHTER] a lot of questions still on the table.

John: And you mentioned the cut off value, and how it’s somewhat arbitrary, and it’s very precise, though, they come up with a specific value, and yet so many of the benefits of education are not measured in salary. People with college degrees have lower unemployment rates, they have longer lifespans, they have higher quality of life, as measured by all sorts of happiness surveys. They have lower probabilities of divorce, they’re less likely to commit suicide, they’re less likely to commit crime, and so there are many aspects of jobs and the returns to education that are just completely being ignored by this focus on one specific value, and that’s kind of troubling.

Debbie: It is troubling, and it’s very, very sad. I hope that we can eventually, as a country, return to a time where we value learning and personal growth. I think our labor market is kind of not really supporting all of our people particularly well right now. I would like to live in a world where if someone is called to ministry, that they don’t have to worry [LAUGHTER] that they can’t go and get a degree that they can afford to pay for, because being a minister is not going to pay very much, or if a person is called to be a pianist, concert pianists don’t always earn a lot of money. Does that mean we taxpayers, with our taxpayer support, that we shouldn’t support that person’s education? I don’t want to live in a world that doesn’t have concert pianists who have been supported all the way through getting a Doctor of Music Arts, because the people who have those degrees are amazing in the way they connect our world to our history through music, and I’m picking on fields that are often sort of the punching boys for “don’t study theater, you’ll never make an income.”

Rebecca: But these are the fields that often contribute a lot to a community, and these measures don’t actually have anything to do with community benefit or the public good.

Debbie: Yep, the public good.

Rebecca: So, on that note, [LAUGHTER] we always end by asking, what’s next?

Debbie: I’m so glad that you are ending with that, because I think there’s no question we will be… we in higher education… will be controlled by these student earnings data for a while. This final OBBBA ruling is supposed to come out of its last session of a negotiated rule making at the end of May, we’re sitting here, May of 2026, we are speaking about this as it’s happening. If you’re starting to pay attention to this, or you’re looking for information about it, I want to enable you to learn more and be empowered. So, really, what’s your favorite publication for higher ed stuff? Is it the Chronicle of Higher Ed, is it Inside HigherEd or even The New York Times and will be covering this information. What you’re looking for is, they might speak about this ruling as financial value transparency work. The old language, which some of us are still kind of stuck in, we talked about this as gainful employment regulations. I have just started seeing reference to a new acronym, STATS, which stands for Student Tuition and Transparency System. I’m not sure, but I think that stats may be how the Department of Ed plans to rebrand the Scorecard, so that when they bring it out as the basic thing undergirding this new regulation of limiting students’ access to loans and Pell grants, that STATS is what we’re going to be looking at. So those are some keywords to look for and listen for, and the last thing is wherever you are, figure out who your institutional researchers are. Make sure that they are pulling up these data files. If you Google Scorecard and higher education, if you Google access and earnings, or if you look for Carnegie classification, all of these will take you to these websites where you can look for the data and download the data and learn about its structure. So don’t wait, be empowered. The federal government has a lot of power in this conversation right now, because they control the data, but we can at least begin to educate ourselves, which is why I wanted to come and talk about this, and I really appreciate that you guys gave me the opportunity, and you ask me great questions, and you listen to my answers, and I hope you’ve learned some about how the data are put together and what we’re going to be looking for in the next couple of months.

John: So one implication of all this is that, in terms of admissions decisions, would this whole incentive system encourage, perhaps, colleges to only accept white males from higher income households because they end up with higher salaries on average.

Debbie: I don’t think we’re going to go there in higher ed. What I think is more likely is an acceleration of what we’re already seeing. I have a daughter in school in Indiana, and she keeps me apprised of what they’re doing out there, so I pay attention. I think many states have used the OBBBA work as a reason to go through and cull their programs, not particularly on the basis of earnings, but to get rid of all the small programs, and these two things tend to go together. They just do. So, I know Indiana has chopped a ton of programs. Universities are eliminating small programs left and right under an argument that they’re saving money, that they don’t have enough resources to maintain these programs. Any university with an IR person worth their salary is making sure that universities do not eliminate small programs that have very high earnings. I worked at a university that had a really small engineering program. They’re not going to eliminate that program, [LAUGHTER] even though it’s really hard and expensive to run, but those students do earn really high salaries. I think, getting to your point, John, universities are so desperate for tuition revenue, I do not think that they are going to filter for the potential future earnings of white men. Some might, but I don’t know. I’ll do that research four years from now, and I’ll come back and let you know how it’s going. [LAUGHTER]

John: It’s just one of the worst possible outcomes of the incentive system that they’ve devised.

Rebecca: I think it’s really helpful for faculty to be more apprised of this information, because it’s kind of zooming past us as policy and regulations are changing so swiftly, and so having this explainer is very helpful. [LAUGHTER]

John: Yes, thank you. This was really good and it’s things that I think most faculty are not that aware of right now.

Debbie: I think people are viewing it as something that is happening to us, and as I close, saying yes, that’s kind of it, it is happening to us. There may eventually come a time when we can speak back and push to recreate a more equitable, more reasonable understanding that incorporates more of the community values and the public values that we get from higher ed.

John: And we are lucky to be in a state where there is much more support…

Debbie: Oh, yeah…

John: …for the positive aspects of education.

Rebecca: Thank you so much.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing Assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]

447. UDL at Scale

The Universal Design for Learning framework is often adopted by individual faculty for particular courses. In this episode, Tom Tobin joins us to discuss the potential benefits associated with an institution-wide adoption of this framework.

Tom is an internationally recognized scholar, author and speaker on technology mediated education, especially copyright, evaluation of teaching practices, academic integrity, accessibility, and universal design for learning, which is a topic we’ll be talking about today. He helped found the University of Wisconsin Madison Center for Teaching, Learning, and Mentoring. Tom is on Ed Tech Magazine’s Influencers Dean’s List, and has been honored with the Wagner Leadership Award in Distance Learning Administration, and he is one of EduFlow’s global top 100 learning influencers. Tom serves on the boards of Advances in Online Education, The Online Journal of Distance Learning Administration, and the Oklahoma University Press: Teaching, engaging and thriving in higher ed series. We’re very glad that he’s made time to be with us with all these activities. His books include Evaluating Online Teaching, The Copyright Ninja, Reach Everyone, Teach Everyone: UDL in Higher Education, Going Alt-Ac: A Guide to Alternative Academic Careers, Implementing UDL in Irish Further Education and Training, and what we’ll be talking about today, UDL at Scale: Whole-Campus Universal Design for Learning, which is coming out this summer.

Show Notes

Transcript

John: The Universal Design for Learning framework is often adopted by individual faculty for particular courses. In this episode, we explore the potential benefits associated with an institution-wide adoption of this framework.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

John: Our guest today is Thomas J Tobin. Tom is an internationally recognized scholar, author and speaker on technology mediated education, especially copyright, evaluation of teaching practices, academic integrity, accessibility, and universal design for learning, which is a topic we’ll be talking about today. He helped found the University of Wisconsin Madison Center for Teaching, Learning, and Mentoring. Tom is on Ed Tech Magazine’s Influencers Dean’s List, and has been honored with the Wagner Leadership Award in Distance Learning Administration, and he is one of EduFlow’s global top 100 learning influencers. Tom serves on the boards of Advances in Online Education, The Online Journal of Distance Learning Administration, and the Oklahoma University Press: Teaching, engaging and thriving in higher ed series. We’re very glad that he’s made time to be with us with all these activities. His books include Evaluating Online Teaching, The Copyright Ninja, Reach Everyone, Teach Everyone: UDL in Higher Education, Going Alt-Ac: A Guide to Alternative Academic Careers, Implementing UDL in Irish Further Education and Training, and what we’ll be talking about today, UDL at Scale: Whole-Campus Universal Design for Learning, which is coming out this summer. Welcome back, Tom.

Tom: Thank you, John and Rebecca, it’s a pleasure to be back on Tea for Teaching. Thank you for having me.

Rebecca: Today’s teas are… Tom, are you drinking tea with us today?

Tom: I am. I have some Pure Leaf Unsweetened Iced Tea. So that sound of ice cubes that you hear that’s my preferred form of my iced tea.

Rebecca: Sounds nice and refreshing.

John: And I have spring cherry green tea today. Given that we are apparently in spring, the snow has stopped at least for a few days, so we’re moving into spring here.

Rebecca: I have Lady Grey today.

John: Very good, one of my favorites. So we’ve invited you here today to discuss UDL at Scale. While most of our listeners are familiar with UDL to a greater or lesser extent, could you at least provide a brief overview of the UDL framework to help set the framework of the discussion?

Tom: Absolutely. Universal Design for Learning, or UDL, is a framework based on how we learn as human beings. So it’s based in neuroscience, fairly loosely, if I’m being honest. That when we learn anything, we have to activate three different chemical pathways in our brains. We have to have a reason to learn something. We have to have the content that we’re learning, and we have to be able to reinforce it, practice with it, tie it to other things that we already know. And so these three phases of the learning process, which are themselves a pretty good simplification of very complex chemical cascade in our neuroanatomy, they correspond to three different things that we can do as designers to help people to get started and stick with us when things get challenging, have the information to be able to learn it, and then to show what they know and practice with it. The neuroscientists at CAST in Boston, way back in the late 1980s and early 1990s, they discovered that if we give people one way to get started or take in information or practice, then we’re leaving out other ways that people could engage with that stuff. So what they said was, make more than one way, make multiple ways for people to get engaged, for people to take in information, and for people to practice, and people will choose which one seems best to them in the moment, and that helps the learning to stick. So Universal Design for Learning asks us, as instructors, developers, designers, to make multiple ways that people can get engaged, take in information, and show what they know.

Rebecca: Can you tell us the origin story of your new book, UDL at Scale, and its relationship with your previous work?

Tom: This is a very different book than my previous two books on Universal Design for Learning. When I did Reach Everyone, Teach Everyone: UDL in Higher Education with Kirsten Behling and then when I did the Universal Design for Learning in Further Education and Training for the Irish government, those were practical application based books. People were hungry to have, how do I do this in my own classroom or my own institutional design? That was at an individual level. People wanted to have the nuts and bolts of, what do I do when I’m designing a lesson or an activity or an assessment? One of the big challenges that you started to see over and over again is that whether it’s by law or by policy or by people adopting good ideas, we’ve been putting the burden of making things accessible on the shoulders only of instructors. And we also have not been giving them any release time or extra money or a graduate assistant, or we’ve not taken any work off their plates in order for them to be able to make their materials and engagements more inclusive and more accessible. So it’s not actually a wonder that only about 10% of instructors, wherever we look, have adopted inclusive design techniques of any kind, let alone a specific one, like the Universal Design for Learning Framework. Because of that, when I would talk with boards of trustees, college presidents, provosts, deans, campus leaders, and I would say, “You know that you have these legal requirements.” In the United States, we have the Americans with Disabilities Act. In Canada, it’s the Accessible Canada Act. Worldwide, there are laws that apply to the design of content and materials, and we’re not even doing that really well. So when I would talk with campus leaders, and I would say, you recognize that there is this requirement there, but there’s also an opportunity there to lower access barriers and keep our students with us at greater rates, helping with student persistence, student retention, their satisfaction as alumni. Everybody said, “yeah, those are great ideals, and you know, they’re part of our mission and our values, and we just don’t have the people or the time or the funds to be able to do that widely.” So I wrote the book UDL at Scale as an advice guide and a how-to-manual for campus leaders who think they don’t have the resources to actually get that stuff done. They do, and it’s actually when we think about lowering access barriers, not just in the classroom, not just putting the burden on instructor shoulders, but when we think about training everybody across all of our service touch points: the library, mental health counseling, academic counseling, IT, the media services team, you name it. Training all of those service touch points, to be a little bit more inclusive, to give a few more options, to lower accessibility barriers. It turns out that’s a really good financial decision. And so that was the genesis of the book.

John: In terms of that financial decision. What does the research tell us about the effect of UDL on student success, completion, retention, etc.?

Tom: Oh, this one’s great, because we actually do have research about the impact and effect of inclusive design changes, and every leader at every campus has been tasked with being a change agent. We want to move our institutions into spaces where we are making changes because they are driven by the needs of our employer bases, the needs of our students, the needs and vision of our institutions. So here’s the data, folks. Students, are five times more likely to earn a credential when they feel that they have a voice in their education, when they feel that they have a choice in how they move through their educational paths, when they feel a sense of belonging, that they are a part of the institution and its culture and its community, and rather than apart from it, when they feel like they have some agency, like they’re not just being told, “do this, do that, do the other.” That they have some say in how they move through their conversations with a college or a university, and when they have a sense of safety, that they are psychologically okay to be wrong, to explore, to get things wrong, to fail at things and come back to them. Those five things: voice, choice, belonging, agency, and safety. When students say “yes, I felt these things” during their educations, those students are five times more likely to persist and earn a credential with us. So when we think about all of the touchy feely aspects of it, that actually translates into money, that translates into tuition dollars, that translates into students not dropping out or stopping out as much as they otherwise might. And a lot of different ways that we can approach that have to do with access barriers, and we’ve talked about this in other books, but instructors aren’t the only teachers on our campus. Your media services people are teaching students how to engage with materials and content. Our librarians are teaching students how to discern good information and reliable and trustworthy information from slop that’s out there on the internet. and on and on and on, right? So our registrar is teaching students how to navigate the systems of the college or the university through the catalog and the various programs that we have on offer. So wherever we look at engagement with students, they are, in many cases, teaching engagements, and so we can design for those engagements in order to give people the kinds of choices that you heard about as we started our conversation. Multiple ways to get started and stick with it, multiple ways to take in the information that they’re learning about, and multiple ways to take action or express themselves once that they’re engaged with our service areas across all of our service touch points.

John: When you talk about people being five times more likely, is the benchmark of that students in high school or middle school and so forth, in terms of the probability of going to college and acquiring a degree? Because we do have over half of the students who enter college leaving with some sort of a credential, at least, on aggregate. So to get that number, it would seem like it would have to go back a bit to an earlier stage.

Tom: Oh, I’m actually not even talking about being that ambitious in our research. What I’m talking about is of all the current students who enroll right now, regardless of whether they are 18 years old and coming out of high school, or whether they’re 50 years old and coming back to re-skill. Out of all of those folks, you are correct. About half of them end up with a credential after 6, 7, 8, years usually. So the myth of the undergraduate who gets the degree in four years, that full-time student, is kind of a unicorn. At the same time, when we think about the 50% of students who drop out temporarily or stop out altogether, the number one reason why people don’t receive a credential is financial, “I can’t afford to continue now, or I can’t afford to continue at all.” And the research is fairly clear on this one, that the majority of people who stop out or drop out by financial reasons, it’s for $500 or less. So a lot of colleges and universities have now implemented micro-forgiveness programs, where if you owe less than $500 we’ll just write that off, and you keep going. And that’s an investment in the student, and it turns people into degree earners at far greater rates. But what’s the number two reason? If the number one reason is financial, what’s the number two reason why people stop out or drop out? It’s time, it’s the clock. We are all trying to put our educations into busy schedules. We have work responsibilities, caregiving responsibilities, military service, we just live far away from campus, whatever it is. If there’s a reason why people are busy and trying to put things together, and they don’t really fit all that well into the 24 hours of the day, those reasons are out there. So universal design for learning helps make processes go a little more smoothly. Helps students not to have to call back three times to get their question answered with IT. Helps for there to be less rework, and that’s actually one of the central arguments of the book, is that we’re actually making things a little bit more efficient for us as providers of services, and we’re also making things smoother and easier for our students in terms of process. We’ll talk about academic rigor later, but your question is an astute one, and the research that I’m citing in the book is fairly narrow, taking our existing pool of people who start, how many of them will finish?

Rebecca: Well, it’s certainly a compelling argument to implement, and we were talking about the time of not implementing. It costs a lot of time if we have inefficient and terrible processes. [LAUGHTER] We also talked about the burden on faculty trying to meet accessibility requirements, or introducing or rolling out UDL on their own. So if we think about institutional rollout, you can think about is there like aggregate benefits by rolling it out, but there’s also, seems like there might be some startup costs there too, in terms of time and effort. Can you talk a little bit about that?

Tom: Oh, Rebecca, that’s an astute question. Because right now, listeners, we’re recording this in late April of 2026 and in the United States, we just had a deadline to implement the Title II updates to the Americans with Disabilities Act. For those of you not familiar with that, by the end of April in 2026 we were all, colleges and universities, supposed to have all of the materials that we host in internet and in mobile formats comply with the Web Content Accessibility Group Standards. So there are 50 different standards for web hosted materials. And absolutely no one, and I mean no one, was going to be compliant as of the deadline. So the United States Department of Justice and Department of Education pushed that deadline back a year, and now it’s April of 2027. And it’s going to be April of 2027 and we’re going to be wringing our hands, going, “Oh my gosh, we’re not compliant still.” I guarantee that. So there’s a prediction for you, listeners. But Rebecca, your question has to do with that kind of situation. So when we, as colleges and universities, think about compliance with the law around accessibility, that means that that compliance usually falls on individuals’ shoulders. You, instructor of this biology course, you created all these materials, now it’s up to you to make them accessible. And when we think at that individual level, every individual has to be perfect in order for an institution to say that they are compliant. So if you’ve got one department that doesn’t get there, then the entire institution fails. So let’s turn that around, and when we think about Universal Design for Learning, when we’re applying it in an individual course, I actually want people to do a little bit less when we’re thinking about institution-level application. And one of the reasons why people are a little panicked now about those WCAG 50 standards is that we are asking communications professors and art historians and chemists to suddenly become experts in web design, and that’s not what the idea is about with that legal compliance issue. So when you think about people engaging in Universal Design for Learning at the individual level, the impact doesn’t have to be perfect. It doesn’t have to mean everyone does UDL to some perfect level where you get green check marks all throughout your learning management system with a particular tool. Imagine, and I’ve used this analogy before, it’s a good one for this conversation, too. Listeners, imagine that there are 20 steps to shining perfect, accessible content in your courses. There aren’t, but just for the sake of argument, let’s say there are 20 steps. Most places will spend some time, money, and effort to train a couple dozen people to get to step 18. And then we say, “You are our champions. Go train everyone else.” That’s where it breaks down, the “go train everyone else.” Other people are not being given extra time or time off, or they don’t get any support to actually focus their attention on these issues. What I wanted to do with Universal Design for Learning at Scale was to offer ways that we not get everyone to step 18, 19, 20, but to get absolutely everyone in the college or the university to step 2. What are some simple things that everyone does that become part of our everyday workflows? And so I’m indebted to our colleague Jordan Cameron at Kennesaw State University. Years ago, she came up with what she called “The Basic Four,” and that was if everybody did these four things, then some people on campus who were specialists could help with the really tough or knotty or detailed nuanced affordances, but everybody would do these four things. They would make alternative text for images that are displayed on websites in the learning management system and elsewhere. They would use semantic structure, so the heading level. putting things as titles in text-based documents. They would use captions or transcripts for video resources. And they would engage in inclusive procurement. They would engage in a process where, if the college or university is buying and supporting technology tools, they would only buy and support tools that were accessible and met those legal requirements. And if everybody did just those four things, it would, One, spread the workload around. Two, it would make sure that the expertise was available for the really challenging cases of accessible design. Three, it would allow everyone to adopt inclusive practices in a low-stakes way across their everyday workload. Meaning it’s not extra to do inclusive work, it’s actually part of our jobs, and it’s not a huge part of our jobs that we would need to fold in new things. So when we think about “the individual has to be perfect, but the collective only has to be good.” That’s what I’m aiming for. So when we think about individual courses with UDL, yes, institution-wide adoption is a little bit different than the sum of everyone just doing UDL in their own space. In fact, I don’t want to turn everyone into experts in the three principles and the nine guidelines and the 36 considerations of the Universal Design for Learning Framework. There should be people on campus who do that and know that. At the same time, everybody should have some real simple principles and practices that they can engage in that are consistent throughout all of our employees in a college or a university. So, excellent question. Thank you.

John: Have any institutions committed to a UDL-at-scale approach?

Tom: There have been, to my counting, 13 institutions who’ve actually gone from, “Hey, that’s a good idea” to “our institution is actually doing it.” I had the privilege and the pleasure of working with five of those. And I actually want to highlight one where I wasn’t the consultant, and they did it all on their own. This is Atlantic Technological University in Sligo, Ireland. And for listeners here in North America, they are a cross between what we would call a technical college, a community college, and a four-year undergraduate college. They do all of those things within their technological university mandate. What they discovered was that they were serving learners who lived all over the place in northwestern Ireland. So folks were living a 45-minute or an hour commute away by car, and a lot of their students were driving very long distances to be able to come to one of their many campuses. So what they did was they adopted an inclusive mindset, and of course, in Europe, they have the United Nations Strategic Development Goals, or SDGs. Inclusion is one of them, lowering access barriers is another one of those. So they used those as their guiding principles, and then they adopted Universal Design for Learning as a framework that allowed them to operationalize those aspirational principles. When we think about how that works, one of the first things that they did was convincing instructors and employees and staff members to adopt UDL. And of course, there were a lot of folks with their arms crossed saying, “I got along without this before. Why do I have to do this now? This seems like extra work.” The one change that they did, and I want to highlight this, their President and their board of directors said, “We want to be the most inclusive college or university in the country, and that’s a goal toward which we are all headed. We are going to put resources toward this in terms of time, people, and money,” but they didn’t do the next step that you might suggest. You might think that the next step was, “Here’s our plan, and now everybody follow it.” Their next step was to move away from “you must,” to move away from mandates and compliance and move into support. They said, “Here’s the goal. We want everybody to achieve these kinds of inclusive practices in your support area, in your department, in your study, and you tell us what it’s going to take to get to that goal, and we’ll support you.” So what happened from a top-down level was that the support that people were asking for was very different in different places. Some places wanted time, some places wanted funding, some places wanted a couple of experts to come in and help them think about things, and the senior leaders at that institution did those things. Did they do them perfectly, exactly as asked? No. At the same time, that listening attitude, that attitude of “this is a service that we’re providing to you,” it was great. When instructors would think about, “Oh, I want to make some of my content more universally designed,” and they would go talk with their teaching center folks or their learning designers, the learning designer would say, “Oh, yeah, we can teach you how to do this, or we can do this along with you.” And so that wasn’t perceived as, “Oh, here’s another law that applies to me, and now I have to do things differently.” It was perceived by instructors as, “Oh, the whole place is moving in this direction, and now this is a service on which I can rely.” Doing that actually spread the workload around and made it a slow and incremental change where people could ask questions and voice concerns and they got listened to. So that was a wonderful way that the folks at ATU actually implemented Universal Design for Learning. So now it’s part of their policy manual. It’s part of their mission and vision, and it’s also part of just the way they do things, because they actually shifted the culture.

Rebecca: What I’m hearing you say, Tom, is that the leadership at the institution modeled this practice by rolling out UDL in a UDL way, and gave folks some agency and some choice.

Tom: Yeah, students are not the only people who are five times more likely to stick with something when they feel they have a voice, choice, belonging, agency and safety, correct? So you’re making a connection, Rebecca, that I think listeners, you can also make. We as employees, whether we are part of the leadership team, whether we’re instructors and faculty members, whether we are service members and staff members. We are also learners, we are also human beings who want to have a clear reason why we’re doing the thing. We want to be able to get access to the information and the content that we’re going to use, and we want to be able to take action in a way that is meaningful for us. So we absolutely can UDL the process of adopting UDL. Yes.

John: Now, on your first book on UDL, you advocated a plus one approach to UDL adoption, and I think that’s something that many people have picked up on as making it a little bit more feasible or easier to manage. Do you make a similar suggestion at the institutional level?

Tom: It’s an unfair question, John, because I didn’t predict when I wrote, Reach Everyone, Teach Everyone with Kirsten Behling, that my idea of approaching Universal Design for Learning, not as here’s three principles that turn into nine guidelines that turn into 36 considerations that we should just approach that as plus one thinking, if there’s one way for an engagement to happen, now make one more way. That was always meant to be a starting point for UDL practice, not the entirety of everyone’s understanding of it. And I’ve been very honored and pleased to see that that plus one idea has really taken root. People know plus one as a way to start Universal Design for Learning, because it’s simple, it’s easy to understand and it’s easy to get your brain around it, and it also is small. Take one action, try one thing, do one experiment, and see what happens. Now you’re asking me to predict which of the ideas from my new book are going to take off because they are so simple or so resonant with people that they’re just going to latch on to it. I don’t know which one of those ideas is going to take off. If I had to put forward two candidates, though, one of them, we just talked about, shift from compliance to support. It seems like a very small and philosophical change. At the same time, changing the messaging around the activities that you’re doing as an institution, changes people’s perception of what those things are. It goes from “Oh, this is required of me,” to “Oh, this is a service on which I can rely.” And shifting from compliance to support narratives, those are the kinds of things that actually shift cultures and change people’s minds. So that’s one. And then a second one, I have a diagram in the book. Listeners, you can’t see it, but I’ll describe it very briefly. Think about a rectangle that is wider than it is tall. Over on the left-hand side, we’ll put “beginner” at the bottom of that. We’ll put “proficient” in the middle, and then we’ll put “approaching expert” on the other side. That’s a timeline of the learning process when people are beginners, when they’ve got a few ideas, when they’re getting it, and they’re almost experts with us. Now draw a line that starts at the very bottom, over by beginner, and goes to the very top, near proficient. We’ve just divided our rectangle into a growing and a diminishing triangle. The diminishing triangle is UDL, Universal Design for Learning, and it’s designed UDL. This is where we, as instructors, designers, developers, facilitators, when people are beginners, we want to design almost all of the boundaries and the possibilities for our learners. We tell them what to read, what to look at, what to do as exercises, so that they will get all of the foundational information. And then, as that triangle gets smaller and smaller over time, we start taking our safeguards and guardrails and left and right boundaries away. And then, by the time people are almost experts, we’re not giving them hardly any guidance or structure, we’re asking them to do. Now, the triangle that’s increasing over time, it starts out almost at nothing when people are beginners. That’s tool use. This is using AI tools, this is using calculators, this is any kinds of tools that people can use to support their learning. When they’re beginners, we don’t want them using any tools. We want them to learn things the hard way, the manual way, the long way, so that they actually struggle with and get the foundational concepts and the practice that we’re doing. Then by the time they’re proficient in the middle there, tool use grows and we start saying, “Okay, now here use tools to help you learn.” This is telling people not to use artificial intelligence to summarize their reading, but to use AI to make study questions about the reading and to use AI to help the learning process itself, but then by the time they get to be proficient, and, after that, when they get to be expert with us, then we say, “Okay, go ahead and use the tools to skip some steps,” because we’re going to use those AI tools, perhaps, to do easier or introductory level kinds of things, so that we can use our human brains to start working on more nuanced or more complex thinking processes. Now, readers, take one more line up at the top of this rectangle, start and draw a rising line from left to right, and we’re going to put one lopsided triangle on top. That is agentic UDL. And it has to go in lock step as our designed UDL diminishes over the learning process, we have to start replacing it with learner agency. We tell our learners not go read this thing and do this activity, but we say, “What kinds of resources do you need or want now? What kinds of activities would help you to learn better on this?” And we become more guides rather than dictators of the things. So when we think about that lopsided house, my hope is that that diagram will take off, because it’s a simple way to think about the entire learning process and what goes into it. And spoiler alert, listeners, it’s fractal. That learning process can happen over the course of an individual lesson, over the course of a unit, over the course of an entire class offering, over the course of an entire credential. So we can go through that process at lots of different scales. So awesome question, and even though it was unfair, I do have two candidates for the things that I hope will take off.

Rebecca: But I think you also reiterated the idea that the plus one can help an institution get started, because it’s iterative, it changes over time, it’s scaffolded, it’s all the things that you’ve been describing.

Tom: And that’s 100% on purpose. I try to offer ideas that are easy to put your brain around, and then get really nuanced and complex when you start implementing them, because you have the agency and the choice to be able to do that design in a way that works well for you and for your learners.

Rebecca: In addition to the support model that you’ve been talking about, as institutions begin to commit to UDL, can you talk a little bit about what kinds of incentive structures they may want to consider to help faculty employees stay aligned with this framework?

Tom: Ooh, can I turn your question inside out a bit, Rebecca? You talked about incentive structures. And incentives are things that we give people when they’re doing things that they don’t normally do. What I want to do is I want to make Universal Design for Learning just part of our everyday workflows. So an incentive would mean “I’m going to pay you extra to do some extra thing” or “I’m going to give you release time, because this is hard and you need some time to do it.” Initially, yes, those things need to be in place because it’s different from the way that we do things now. The goal for me, though, is that we’re not creating incentives that mentally label UDL as extra or on top of the work that we should be doing. So I want to turn the question a little inside out and say that my advice to everyone who’s a campus leader is the very first thing you can do is to put Universal Design for Learning into job descriptions for new hires and into the performance evaluation process. Make Universal Design for Learning expected of people who come into the institution as new employees, and make UDL practices part of the measurable criteria by which people’s jobs are assessed. That’s not exactly an incentive program. And if you just put them into the job descriptions and new hire offerings without actually training people on what that looks like, then you’re setting them up for failure. So having the training available before those changes happen, having an opportunity for people to be assessed on Universal Design for Learning once or twice through the cycle without it counting, so that they get the feedback, but if they haven’t been doing well with it, that they get an opportunity to say, “Oh, wait, I probably need to go attend the workshops or get some coaching or work with a mentor on this.” But I’m a big fan of letting people fail without consequences.

Rebecca: Jeez, that sounds like another UDL principle being highlighted right here.

Tom: It’s not technically in the UDL guidelines, but it does absolutely show up in guideline eight, and we can nerd out about that later. [LAUGHTER] But listeners, what we’re thinking about here is when we think about giving people the opportunity to try things out, work with them in their own fashion, but also holding them accountable, like accountability is a key driver to scaling up any change at any institution, and with Universal Design for Learning, it’s no different. The difference here is that I want to suggest give people an opportunity to have a minute to get in touch with and apply these ideas and then assess them, but don’t ding them if their assessment is poor. Say, “Okay, this didn’t work,” or “You need more time on this,” or “You need this a different way.” Let’s work with what actually is going to help move the needle here. I also want to share, the bar should be incredibly low. We’re not looking for a 100% or a green score in the learning management system on Blackboard Ally, where it’s checking all the accessibility. Universal Design for Learning and accessibility are actually different. Accessibility just means that that’s sort of the floor that’s where everybody should be doing this as a matter of course, and Universal Design for Learning is a framework that allows us to move beyond just what’s compliant. So excellent question, and thank you for letting me play with it.

John: And by making it part of the culture of the institution and part of the regular expectations, then it does build in a little bit of loss aversion, which is a behavioral economics principle, which suggests that the threat of losing a job [LAUGHTER] by not doing it might have much more of an impact than the possibility of getting incentives for doing something. That’s perhaps an overly harsh way of suggesting that.

Tom: Listeners you heard John say that, and not me, right? [LAUGHTER] But I’m also not a behavioral economist, fairly, though.

John: But one, point though, that I think is worth at least discussing is that many faculty become concerned about new initiatives that are initiated by their current administration in the institution, when institutions have a fair amount of turnover at the top. How can institutions build this into the culture of the institution in a way that is going to persist after the administration turns over?

Tom: Ooh, excellent question. There’s a very short phrase in higher education that is meant to be ironic or satiric. It’s called “new provost, new priorities.” So every few years, a new senior leader comes in and they say, “We were doing this, and now we’re going to do that.” And in some institutions, it changes every year or so, right? The campus leaders go to a leadership conference, they hear about the next big new thing, and suddenly the funding and the winds change. It’s a reasonable response if you’ve been there long enough to kind of fold your arms across your chest and say, “I’m just going to wait until the winds change again and change again, and maybe I won’t have to actually do an awful lot with all of these big new priorities.” So there’s an individual and a collective way to respond. Individual way is to play to people’s own interests. And we’ve talked about this in other conversations and books. It’s still true. Ask people where they’re already finding challenges or gaps. Where is it that you give the directions for an activity and you get an email 400 times from your students, all asking the same clarifying question about the direction? Where is it that you give a splendid lecture, and then everybody gets that concept wrong on the exam, you’ve got to reteach. Where are those places where people are already going to do a little work to redesign or think again about how they’re approaching a particular idea, concept or process? Those are always good places to start thinking in a more inclusive way, because you can lower some barriers, not only for the learners, but also for yourself. So when we think about UDL, the selling point of UDL for individuals is that a little bit of effort now actually saves you a lot of effort later. And you know where you’re putting in all of that repeated effort that just seems to be a time sink. So in your own career, think about that. And then when we think about, at an institutional level, if we’re going to have leadership change over, there are three things we can do right away, and this is all chapter five, people. One, make sure that you are enshrining Universal Design for Learning in your policy manual, this takes the longest amount of time. When you’re involved in shared governance, things do not move fast. But if inclusive design is actually part of the identity of the institution and it’s part of the mission that we’re on. Folks at Greensboro College in North Carolina actually did adopt this first into their mission, and worked back from that into practice and into making it part of their everyday work. Two, when we think institutionally, we actually talked about this as well. Putting Universal Design for Learning into those job descriptions and performance evaluations means that you’re changing culture by fiat. And John, you said it in a different way than I would have [LAUGHTER] in terms of risk or loss aversion. But when we think about risk, we can think about risk in negative ways and positive ways. So the negative risk is, “Oh, if I don’t do this, I might lose my job, or I won’t get my promotion.” But the positive risk aspect of it is, if we do this, then we are likely to have more students stick with us. If we do this, we are more likely to have fewer students asking the same question over and over and over again or tripping over the same stumbling blocks intellectually or practically. And then the third thing that we can think about when we’re working at scale is that institutional culture, the people who are there the longest typically aren’t the senior leaders, it’s typically the folks in operations. So the folks who are running the departments and the support units, we’ve got the institutional memory. So in trying Universal Design for Learning in your practices at your unit level, put it in the handbook, put it in the manual, put it in the new employee onboarding that you do. That’s where it’s going to stick, because provosts and presidents come and go, it’s a truism in higher education. And the folks who are here for the long haul, Universal Design for Learning helps us do our jobs more efficiently, with less stress, less anxiety, and it helps our students to be more successful. It does require effort and work, and to the extent that we can make time, put money, assign people to those tasks, the better. But even if we don’t have a lot of any of those three things, we can still shift how people act.

John: And if students are learning more, it tends to be much more enjoyable for faculty.

Tom: Wow, I didn’t put that in the book. Seriously, I didn’t put that in the book because one of the biggest arguments that we have for Universal Design for Learning is that it helps students to learn more effectively, and I guarantee you that that is not an argument that moves anyone to open their budget. So this book, like I was saying at the very beginning, is a very different kind of argument to the one that I have produced in other books. In other books, we’re talking about social justice, we’re talking about efficiency, we’re talking about efficacy for the students. In this book, we’re talking about, “Yeah, this actually makes sense, because it means that we’re spending our money more effectively and wisely, and helps us with reducing rework and making processes more efficient.” This is language that I’m not used to using all the time, and it’s language that most campus leaders are very used to hearing.

Rebecca: It’s important to have campus leadership on board to make this a cultural shift, but it doesn’t have to start there. It can start from anyone at a university who’s committed to this work. Do you have some strategies that individuals might use, collectively or individually, to start to nudge an administration to consider adopting the UDL framework for the entire institution?

Tom: We’re actually heading in that direction in our conversation already, aren’t we?

Rebecca: We are.

Tom: So if you’ve got a grassroots effort where you can show that Universal Design for Learning actually does have an effect on student retention, or more tuition coming in, or fewer people dropping out. Collect those data and share that information with your senior leaders and share it with language that they understand. That is task number one. Talk about its impact on the budget for your unit. Or if it’s not a budget impact, talk about how, instead of putting out little tiny fires over and over and over again, that adopting UDL has meant that you’ve addressed some regular concerns and gaps that happen every day, and that’s actually freed up your staff to go after bigger or more complex challenges and goals. So it actually does help us to shift how we spend our time. Listeners, I don’t know what area you work in, in a college or a university, I guarantee that you have the story of the thing that you spend all your time doing once a year. So for example, I worked with some colleagues at D’Youville University in Buffalo, New York, and the head of their Disability Services Office. She was one of the champions who went through a process of learning more about Universal Design for Learning. She shared that on average, she was chasing 70 plus students every semester because they had to actually actively request their accommodations every semester, it’s not just like you get your accommodations and then you’re good for four more years or six more years. So every semester, she would be sending out email messages to people’s .edu address saying, “Hey, quick reminder, you have to request this every semester.” And she spent literally 80 to 120 hours of her own time, and then 80 to 120 hours of the four people in her office chasing down these requests. And then they made one UDL change. When people initially sought a disability accommodation, they asked the students, “We’re going to send stuff to your campus address. Would you be willing to share your cell phone number with us so we could text you? We promise we won’t spam you.” 90 plus percent of the students on intake shared their cell numbers, and when she sent out the reminder, “Hey, you got to do this every semester,” it went to their email address and it went to their cell phone number, if they had shared it. They literally went from chasing 70 or more students over the course of weeks every semester to two. Two people needed reminders more than once. So making that UDL choice about giving people more than one way that they can get the information helped them to actually reduce a huge time barrier for their staff, and that meant that their disability service staff weren’t playing phone tag and email tag with people, but they were able to actually do the work that they were hired to do, which is helping students to overcome barriers in the classroom environment. So when we think about convincing the administration, show them examples like that. “Hey, we saved you a whole bunch of money, and now we can work on more complex challenges with the same number of staff members.” That’s an argument that a provost is going to listen to. So show that it works and use language that they understand: budget, retention, persistence.

John: We always end by asking, what’s next? So what’s next for you, Tom?

Tom: My focus is always on quality in higher education. So I’ve got two new books coming out after UDL at Scale, which is coming out in August of 2026. Sometime in 2027 I have Evaluating Teaching in the Digital Era with Annie Taylor and Jean Mandernach. Then in 2028, it’ll be Peer Observation Made Practical with Lauren Barbeau and Claudia Cornejo Happel. And sometime in 2026 or ‘27, I worked with Chris Hromalik at the SUNY System, and we have an article coming out on Universal Design for Learning in Project Management. Plus, I am now a full time professional advisor, so I’m enjoying working with colleges and universities on really complex problems. Listeners, if you go to my website, it’s just ThomasJTobin.com, there’s a free UDL book there on further education and training, John mentioned it in our opener, and you can download that. And if you’ve got a wicked problem that you’re trying to figure out that has to do with the quality of our teaching or access to education, I’d love to hear from you. So thank you again for having me on the program. I love Tea for Teaching. I’m a regular listener. I’ve got my Tea for Teaching mug, and I’ll look forward to where this all goes down the line.

Rebecca: Well, thanks so much, Tom, we always enjoy talking to you and brainstorming how to make some good institutional change.

John: Yes, It’s great talking to you again, and I’m looking forward to seeing you at one of the next conferences coming up.

Tom: Yep, and listeners, if we cross paths in three dimensions, just look for the tall man with white hair, glasses and a giant black mustache and say hello, I’ll be glad to talk with you. Thanks everybody.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing Assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]

446. Teaching Neurodivergent College Students

Neurodivergent students experience challenges in traditional lecture settings. In this episode, Jennifer Pusateri joins us to discuss strategies to reduce these challenges while supporting and leveraging the strengths that neurodivergent students bring to our classrooms.

Jennifer is the Senior Universal Design Consultant at The University of Kentucky and has served as the co-chair of the international UDL in Higher Education Network. She is a member of the CAST National Faculty and is the author of Transform Your Teaching with Universal Design for Learning: Six Steps to Jumpstart Your Practice. Her newest book, A Practical Guide to Teaching Neurodivergent College Students has recently been released by Harvard Education Press.

Show Notes

  • Pusateri, Jennifer L. (2026). A Practical Guide to Teaching Neurodivergent College Students. Harvard Education Press.
  • Brown, T. E. (2013). A new understanding of ADHD in children and adults: Executive function impairments. Routledge.
  • CAST UDL Guidelines
  • Mary-Ann Winklemes – TILT Higher Ed
  • Tom Tobin, Lillian Nave, and Jennifer Pusateri (2025). UDL 3.0. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 395. May 28.
  • Mary-Ann Winklemes (2023). Transparency in Learning and Teaching. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 290. May 24.
  • Viji Sathy and Kelly Hogan (2020). Structured for Inclusion. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 153. September 16.

Transcript

John: Neurodivergent students experience challenges in traditional lecture settings. In this episode, we discuss strategies to reduce these challenges while supporting and leveraging the strengths that neurodivergent students bring to our classrooms.
.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

Rebecca: Our guest today is Jennifer Pusateri. Jennifer is Jennifer is the Senior Universal Design Consultant at The University of Kentucky and has served as the co-chair of the international UDL in Higher Education Network. She is a member of the CAST National Faculty and is the author of Transform Your Teaching with Universal Design for Learning: Six Steps to Jumpstart Your Practice. Her newest book, A Practical Guide to Teaching Neurodivergent College Students has recently been released by Harvard Education Press. Welcome back, Jennifer.

Jennifer: Delighted to be here with you all.

John: Thanks for joining us again, and today’s teas are:… Jennifer, are you drinking tea?

Jennifer: I am and I don’t normally drink tea. So, I’m in central Kentucky, and I will tell you, this is the most beautiful time of year in central Kentucky. It is so green and lush with the blue grass and the horse farms and all of these rolling hills. However, [LAUGHTER] that means it’s also very allergy-ish at the moment, and so I woke up a little froggy today, so I’m drinking Throat Coat tea.

Rebecca: Hopefully that’ll get the job done.

Jennifer: We’ll see.

John: And Rebecca?

Rebecca: I have an English breakfast tea today.

John: And I have a ginger peach green tea today.

Rebecca: Nice. So we invited you here today to discuss A Practical Guide to Teaching Neurodivergent College Students. Can you tell us about the origin of this book?

Jennifer: Yeah. So I’ve been telling folks that I wrote the book I wish my professors had read, [LAUGHTER] because I was not what you would call a great student when it comes to my undergrad. In fact, I opened the book with a screenshot of my actual transcript from my sophomore year of college, and it’s not great… 1.761 GPA I got that semester, which is fantastic. I just didn’t know what I didn’t know. I didn’t know how to learn. I didn’t know what worked best for me, and I did not know at that time that I was ADHD. I was actually diagnosed a little bit later in that year, after being like, “this is not working, like something’s not right here.” My younger daughter is graduating high school and ideally entering college this fall. And I was kind of thinking about, “man, what would I like for her professors to know about teaching neurodivergent students.” She, like Mom, is also ADHD. And I was just kind of hoping that eventually instructors will kind of have a better understanding of what neurodivergence looks like in our students, and that it’s not entirely a deficit.

John: I suppose, before we get too far into the discussion, we should talk a little bit about how you define neurodivergence, just to make sure everyone is on the same starting point.

Jennifer: Yeah, for sure, that’s actually a really good place, I think, to start. Sometimes people balk a little bit about this being a little boring, but I think it’s super interesting. So a neurodivergent brain is a brain that functions differently or outside of what the dominant society says is normal. There is, of course, no such thing as a normal brain. That’s not really how it works. But depending on the society that you’re a part of, there are some expectations for what people assume to be a normal brain. So neurodivergence would be whatever falls outside of that. So if you want to make it a little more clear, from its beginnings, honestly, the word itself was used to describe autistic folks, but also now there’s kind of a larger umbrella, recognizing that there are so many different ways to learn, and that there are so many things that affect the way our brain works when learning. Now we’re including things like ADHD, dyslexia. Some people are including things like depression, anxiety, OCD, and trauma, because we absolutely know that those have an impact on the way our brain works. So, that’s kind of the broad understanding of neurodivergence.

Rebecca: What proportion of college students might fit under this umbrella of neurodivergent.

Jennifer: This depends, I guess, on what you recognize as counting as neurodivergent. What I mean to say is that there’s no one definition of neurodivergence. It’s not a medical term. Some people include certain groups, and some don’t. I tend to use a broader umbrella when describing neurodivergent folks, and the reason that is important when thinking about kind of what percentage are we looking at? So I’ll start with ADHD being one of the most prevalent, about 14% of undergrads, and this is using data from spring of 2025, have ADHD. About 6% of them are dyslexic. Autism is around 3%. Those numbers all seem a little low to me, but that’s what we have from the data. I personally include, as we just talked about, things like depression, anxiety, OCD, and trauma, and so this is where our numbers start to get a little bit bigger. So when we’re looking at our undergrads in the US, 27% identify as being treated for depression, 36% of students report anxiety, and OCD is about 6%, trauma is about 8%. Of course, we don’t just add all of those numbers up. That’s not really how that works. We do know that many, many students who are neurodivergent also have depression and anxiety as well. So like if we just counted, let’s just assume that if we included everything else, everyone else is represented already, we’re going to pretend, underneath depression and anxiety, then that highest number is 36%. So we’re looking at roughly a third of our students have brains that are working in a way that’s outside of what the dominant society considers to be normal, and that’s a lot, a third of our students. That’s a huge amount of students., when we really sit down and think about it.

Rebecca: So one of the things that you indicated in your own story is that you didn’t know that you were ADHD when you were a student. So, we know that there’s wildly under-reported cases because students don’t want to disclose for a wide range of reasons, or they simply don’t know, even though you’re kind of identifying one-third, it could be much bigger. [LAUGHTER]

Jennifer: It really could. And something else that we know for sure is that everyone that needs a diagnosis does not have a diagnosis. There’s a lot of reasons that someone couldn’t get a diagnosis. It costs a lot of money, it requires people to take time off work to take their kids to appointments and do things like that. So there are some pretty significant barriers already just in receiving a diagnosis. So we know that that absolutely exists. And then we also know students are arriving at college, and many are choosing not to disclose that they have a disability of any kind. And so we know for sure there are a lot who are falling through the cracks because they’re either not requesting or not receiving the accommodations that they probably need.

John: And along those lines, I would expect the under-reporting would be more common among low-income students and students for whom getting that documentation would be a bit more challenging.

Jennifer: Yeah, that makes a lot of sense, and I don’t have that research or data on hand, but I know that it exists, and that’s pretty much what it says. And then we also think about things like cultural norms. There are some cultures that are not going to see and understand things like ADHD or autism in the same way that others would. They may not even understand that this is something they need to be thinking about with their children, and then therefore they arrive at college and they don’t have the diagnosis that they need.

Rebecca: Can you talk a little bit about the strengths that neurodivergent students bring into our classes.

Jennifer: Yeah, man, there are so many strengths, and this is one of my favorite things to talk about. In the book, I have a diagram where I’ve kind of made a three-way Venn diagram overlapping the strengths of our ADHD students, our autistic students, and our dyslexic students, because the strengths overlaps so much, which I think is really interesting. But some of the things you would typically think about… students who are ADHD are going to be maybe a little more spontaneous, perhaps more energetic. They often are very self aware. And then they’re also going to overlap with autism, especially when it comes to hyper focus. Hyper focus just being that you can focus your attention in on something that you are interested in or care about in a very significant way, to the detriment of other things, like having to use the restroom, or drink water [LAUGHTER] or whatever. That hyper focus really is a big piece of ADHD and autism. We also see ADHDers and autistic folks being very justice and fairness oriented, which I think is super interesting as well. And then when we think about dyslexia, individuals with dyslexia often have more of a visual thinking pattern, like they’re thinking in pictures. Often that can mean that they have a completely different way of understanding and sharing the information that they’re learning about. So they may be able to put together a really good or really helpful diagram that someone else wouldn’t think of, someone else without dyslexia may not even consider or not even be able to place together, but they just seem to have this very big strength when it comes to dyslexia and having things like visuals. So that also overlaps a little bit. We have a lot of out of box thinking when it comes to folks with dyslexia, also ADHD, and then that visual-spatial awareness or reasoning we also see in folks who have autism. In this diagram I have in the book, I have the center in the middle, which is all three of these bigger categories of neurotypes, ADHD, autism, and dyslexia. And I’m listing in there five different overlapping strengths, and I think these are super interesting when it comes to higher ed because if you think about these, and I’m going to share them here in just a second, think about them in terms of hiring a grad student to help with something like qualitative research. So here are the strengths: they’re very interest driven, they’re good at problem solving, they’re excellent at pattern seeking and pattern recognition, creativity, and curiosity. So when I think about someone who could be a qualitative researcher, a graduate student, perhaps, those are the qualities I want. I want someone who’s picking up on patterns that I maybe don’t see, someone who’s very strongly driven by their interest in the things that they care about, and who’s also really good at curiosity, that’s kind of driving them along to understand better the things that they’re researching. I really do see a lot of these strengths as being very helpful in higher education, especially when we think about things like research.

John: And one of the areas you discuss in the book is executive functioning, and I think most people have at least a general sense of that term, but could you define it a little bit more precisely, and also maybe talk a little bit about what can interfere with students’ executive functioning in our classrooms.

Jennifer: So executive function, it’s basically just this grouping of skills and processes that monitor and regulate all kinds of important things, so things like focus and attention, things like our emotions, regulating emotion, organization, time management, prioritization, those kinds of things, goal setting. And there’s a lot more. There are a lot more pieces. And the problem with executive functioning and defining it is, just like neurodivergence, there’s no one definition. There are lots of definitions. And so I choose to use a specific one in this book, because the model I use, which is Thomas Brown’s model, really focuses in on the emotions piece and also the processing piece. And those are things that I don’t always see in executive functioning models, and I think those are some pieces that maybe have been missed a little bit in higher ed, so I really like that model for that reason.

Rebecca: What can we do in the classroom to help support executive function. 10:53

Jennifer: I think a big one that a lot of people think of up front is focused attention and motivation. In my book, I have broken down these sort of challenges into six categories to make it a little bit easier. It can be overwhelming. There’s so many pieces, so many things that executive functioning touches that I wanted to group it a little bit. So the first group is focus, attention, and motivation. That might mean that students who are neurodivergent are going to have a difficult time sitting and passively listening for long periods of time… more than 10 minutes, maybe. So that may be an issue. It also might be things like motivation. I’ll speak for myself. I am not motivated by things I don’t care about. If I have to do things I don’t care about, perhaps I have to take a class that’s outside of my major, or is a general ed class, or whatever, it’s going to be like pulling teeth to get me to do the things in that class, because it’s something I don’t care about. So those are the kinds of things we might see when it comes to focus, attention, and motivation of students having difficulties. Another big piece is organization and structure. A lot of times, neurodivergent folks have difficulty seeing these structures that kind of underlie everything. One of the things I think about is reading a journal article. Someone who’s neurodivergent may read several journal articles but still not see that there’s sort of an underlying structure or order or grouping or whatever of this is how research reads. So in my field, education, research tends to be laid out the same, like it’s always going to start with an introduction, and you’re going to move to this next piece, and then you’re going to move to this next piece. And if that’s not clearly stated or laid out, sometimes it’s difficult for neurodivergent folks to guess that or to see that. And then other things like time management, prioritization. These are things we see all the time with all of our students, but even more so with our neurodivergent students, struggling with things like turning in assignments on time or planning enough time ahead so that they can study or write or whatever to turn something in by a certain deadline. So, those are things we see in a lot of our students, which also brings me to another thought, that we know for sure that undergraduates are of an age where their prefrontal cortex, part of their brain, is not fully developed yet. That doesn’t happen until about age 25 or even 30 for some folks. We can pretty much guess that all of our undergrads are going to struggle at some point with executive functioning. That’s one of the things I really am trying to kind of get across in this book too, is that when you’re setting up your course and your instruction to support neurodivergent students, you’re actually doing that to support all of your students. And those things end up being really useful for many students, in addition to those who are neurodivergent. And then we can also think about other pieces, like sensory and emotional regulation. Those are kind of overlooked often in a higher ed academic setting, but are really important to students being able to work effectively and efficiently without getting overwhelmed or overstimulated.

Rebecca: So you’ve outlined some of the struggles that students might have related to executive function. What can instructors do to help support these students to overcome these struggles?

Jennifer: Well, one of the things we can think about is if we know that we’re going to have many students who are going to struggle with, let’s say, focused attention and motivation, that they’re going to have a difficult time paying attention for more than, I don’t know, 10 minutes or so, then knowing that up front, we can really think about the way that we’re structuring our lectures, or our in-class meeting time, so that we’re breaking that up a little bit with smaller periods, or little bursts of activity, whatever that might be. There are lots of things that you can build in. So you might lecture for 10 minutes or so and then pause, and you can have everyone do a quick one minute reflection writing, or they could even just do a simple turn and talk with their neighbor, because when they pause from the passive listening, and you do something active, it almost is like it resets the timer. As an ADHDer, I have this like internal timer of about how long I can sit and listen and not do something. [LAUGHTER] Stopping after about 10 minutes, doing a quick reflection, or turn and talk with someone next to me, resets that timer. Personally, as an ADHDer, I have this, like, internal timer of about how long I can sit and listen and not do something. [LAUGHTER] And so, like, stopping after about 10 minutes, doing a quick reflection or turn and talk with someone next to me resets that timer now. And now you got another 10 minutes or so where I’m able to really stay focused and listen and engage with what you’re talking about, and then that timer runs out again. As an instructor, if we kind of know that, we can build in these pieces throughout our lectures or even just our course meeting times. And that’s going to be useful, obviously, for our neurodivergent students, but if we’re building in things like reflections or turn and talk or whatever, there’s a lot of research that doing those things in the midst of a lecture is going to help with student memory retention and understanding of the things that they’re talking about. So again, we see this theme come back, that when we build in things that are going to support our neurodivergent students, we are actually supporting all of our students.

John: I was thinking that as you were talking about some of the issues with executive functioning, because issues of student engagement are pretty common and go far beyond just a third of our students. It’s really nice that these approaches can be useful for everyone. So in addition to providing structure and taking breaks and engaging in active learning activities, you also recommend throughout the book using a UDL approach to reduce some of the challenges that neurodivergent students face in our classrooms. Can you provide some examples of the benefits of providing multiple means of engagement, representation, and action and expression?

Jennifer: Definitely. This is, I think, one of the biggest ones. Of course, the UDL guidelines were updated in 2024 and we used to call the bullet points, checkpoints, but now we call them considerations in UDL. Consideration 7.1 which is in the welcoming interests and identities category or guideline says, “optimize choice and autonomy,” and this one for neurodivergent people, is key. An ADHDers brain, an autistic student’s brain, is an interest-driven brain, and so, when we can provide students with the opportunity to choose something within their learning path, maybe that’s the topic for a paper or a project or something, that gives them the opportunity to choose something that kind of aligns with some of their special interests, or things they are interested in otherwise, and by doing that, that’s going to increase their motivation, that’s going to increase their engagement, and they’re actually going to probably produce better work for you than if they did not have that choice. So, building in that choice and autonomy is a game changer for a lot of neurodivergent folks. When we’re thinking about representation, there are several in there, but the one I was thinking about earlier is Consideration 2.5 and so this one is in the language and symbols guideline, and it’s “illustrate through multiple media.” We know that a lot of neurodivergent folks really respond well and tend to learn well and understand better from visuals. So anytime we can include a graphic organizer, or we can include a clear diagram or a visual or a video, something visual that goes along with more of the text-based things that we’re learning, is going to be super useful for neurodivergent students. So that’s my suggestion for representation. And then when it comes to that action and expression chunk, we’re going to think about the bottom right guideline in blue, and that one is now called “strategy development” (it used to be called “executive function”). Consideration 6.3 asks us to think about organizing our information and resources. To me, as an instructor, this reminds me, if I just give them the things, but I don’t have any good organizational structure around it, it can still be really tricky. Occasionally I see some faculty that will put everything in Canvas… we use Canvas at our university… will put all of the documents that a student needs for a course in the files part of their Canvas course with no organizational structure whatsoever, no modules, no grouping, and that could be really tricky. So it’s going to trip students up when they’re trying to find the things that they’re looking for. It’s also going to be wasting a little bit of their cognitive load or cognitive energy in trying to find those things. So we can organize things like our Canvas courses, our syllabi, etc, thinking about really good structure. When we’re teaching, we can clarify the information hierarchy. And what I mean is, when people learn new information, that information is all at the same importance level, until someone tells you otherwise. And so we can try to be more clear and explicit about that structure. So I might use something like a guided notes document where I have clear headings for kind of the big topics that we’ll be talking about in that day’s lecture, and then that would visually cue students to understand, “Oh, these are the big pieces. These are the most important topics.” And I’ve done that. I’ve kind of elevated that informational hierarchy and made that clear and explicit to the students in the use of that guided notes document.

Rebecca: In addition to using a UDL methodology, what are some other ways to support neurodivergent students in the classroom?

Jennifer: One thing that I think is super important is transparent design. So if you are familiar with the TILT method by Mary-Ann Winklemes and others, that’s a really good way to approach assignments for neurodivergent students, because one of the things that’s really difficult is unclear expectations. So when perhaps an instructor thought they were being clear in their directions, but perhaps could have clarified a little more or maybe made some things kind of broken down a little bit into steps, or checklists, or whatever. When we can do that, that’s going to be really helpful for neurodivergent students. But also, one of the things I really like about that TILT approach to teaching and to instructional design in higher ed is the fact that it elevates the purpose of the assignment. Neurodivergent folks really like to know the why behind things, myself included. I want to understand why we’re doing this. Why are we doing this assignment? Because when I know the why behind the thing, that really helps with my motivation and my engagement. And although I don’t necessarily have to like it or agree with you, I can understand why. That makes a big difference. So, using things like transparent assignment design and transparency in learning and teaching is another great way to do that. It aligns so nicely with universal design for learning, because it’s just asking you to take out all of your assumptions and start thinking proactively about the barriers that your students are going to encounter. UDL is doing that, and transparent assignment design is doing that as well.

John: And we’ll include links to earlier discussions related to this, including the earlier podcast you were on discussing the new UDL guidelines, a podcast with Mary-Ann Winklemes, where she discusses the TILT approach, and a podcast with Viji Sathy and Kelly Hogan, where they talk about the evidence on structure and the importance of structure, because these things are coming from a lot of different areas, and they benefit a lot of students, and specifically, I think Mary-Ann Winklemes and Viji Sathy and Kelly Hogan have emphasized research showing the importance that these things have in reducing many of the equity gaps that we observe in our classes. So these approaches are really useful, and it’s really nice to see the UDL approach combined with the other materials in your book, as well as TILT and the importance of structure. So it’s really a nice guide to effective teaching for everybody, as well as a guide to help reduce some of the challenges faced by neurodivergent students in our classes.

Jennifer: And our neurodivergent students are some of the most brilliant students out of the box, creative thinkers that we have, and so if we can support them on some of these other pieces related to executive functioning, I mean, wow, we’re going to be astounded by what we see in our students. So, I encourage folks to really think about that by supporting neurodivergent students with things like executive functioning and such that you are unleashing that student’s potential in a way that perhaps they had not been able to do before.

John: One of the other things you talk about earlier in your book was that challenges with executive function are often misperceived as indicating a lack of intelligence. Could you talk a little bit about why this misperception occurs, and perhaps how we can break people away from that misperception.

Jennifer: One of the things I actually included in the book, sort of for that reason, I included some quotes from interviews I did with neurodivergent higher ed faculty and staff. I wanted to include their voices, because sometimes I think it can be tricky for instructors. Sometimes they can think that students who maybe have these, what some call invisible disabilities, might be trying to just get something over on them or cheat or make it easier. And so I guess I wanted faculty and instructors to hear from their colleagues, “No, actually, these are things that I did and still struggle with my entire life, and here’s how I have looked at that, or here’s how I help my students now, because of the way that I approach these things well.”

Rebecca: So we always wrap up by asking: “What’s next?”

Jennifer: There are a lot of things I’ve been thinking about recently. One of the things I’m kind of kicking around is we’ve had some really good books that have come out recently that have elevated the stories of neurodivergent faculty and instructors and kind of their experience and what that’s been like for them. I would love to see… and perhaps this will be next on my list of things to do… more support for neurodivergent faculty, because there’s so much executive functioning that goes along with being an instructor in a higher ed situation. I mean, it’s constant. And then thinking about how we’re balancing our teaching with our research and with our service work and all of those things, we could use a little bit of practical support with that, those of us who are neurodivergent instructors in a higher ed setting. So that’s something I’ve been thinking about a little bit lately. I don’t know if that’s a next project or a next book, but I know it’s a thing that we need some support and help with out there in the field.

Rebecca: Definitely, I think that’s something that I hear a lot as we’re talking about digital accessibility efforts and other things in this space, is we spent a lot of time thinking about how to help students, but not always a lot of time thinking about how to help and support colleagues.

Rebecca: Well, thank you so much for joining us. We look forward to sharing your book and getting this episode out into the world.

Jennifer: I appreciate that.

John: And in fact, we liked your book so much that it’s been chosen as one of our fall reading groups here.

Jennifer: Yay!

John: So we’ll have a number of faculty who will be discussing this through the fall semester. So, thank you.

Jennifer: That’s great. Awesome.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing assistance provided by Fred Llerena.

[MUSIC]

442. Not Token Gestures

While colleges and universities have made substantial progress in attracting a diverse mix of students, there are still substantial equity gaps in student outcomes. In this episode, Roberta Hurtado joins us to discuss approaches that can be used to reduce these gaps. Roberta is an associate professor in the English and Creative Writing Department here at SUNY Oswego, where she also serves as Director of Latino and Latin American Studies, and has been a fellow in the Triandiflou Institute for Diversity, Equity, Inclusion, and Transformative Practice. She also has served as a 2023 Fellow in the SUNY Hispanic Leadership Institute.

Show Notes

Transcript

John: While colleges and universities have made substantial progress in attracting a diverse mix of students, there are still substantial equity gaps in student outcomes. In this episode, we explore approaches that can be used to reduce these gaps.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

John: Our guest today is Roberta Hurtado. Roberta is an associate professor in the English and Creative Writing Department here at SUNY Oswego, where she also serves as Director of Latino and Latin American Studies, and has been a fellow in the Triandiflou Institute for Diversity, Equity, Inclusion, and Transformative Practice. She also has served as a 2023 Fellow in the SUNY Hispanic Leadership Institute. Welcome Roberta.

Roberta: Hi, thank you for having me.

Rebecca: Today’s teas are… Roberta, are you having tea with us today?

Roberta: I am. It is Bigelow Cozy Chamomile,.

Rebecca: Nice. Sounds nice and relaxing, something that maybe a continuation of spring break?

Roberta: A little bit. Yeah. [LAUGHTER]

John: We’re just coming off of spring break here, and it is still below freezing here today in Oswego.

Rebecca: How about you, John?

John: I am having a nice, warm Lapsang Souchong today.

Rebecca: Nice. I have a Scottish Breakfast tea today.

John: We’ve invited you here today to discuss your new book, Not Token Gestures: Practical DEI strategies in 21st Century Higher Education. Can you tell us the origin story of this book project?

Roberta: Absolutely. So I was a SUNY HLI fellow in spring of 2023 and part of that institute is a requirement for you to do a capstone project, something that’s going to serve your university, something that’s going to help if there’s a gap or there’s an area where you can lend your expertise to. And at the time, I was working on the Triandiflou Institute fellowship as well. So I was doing them simultaneously, and we were looking at the importance of representation among faculty, and so one of the ways that you can intervene is to directly attend to the hiring practice. Where do you send job ads? What kind of language do you have in job ads? One of the things about the hiring process for faculty is that you might do really great workshops at the very beginning, everybody’s enthusiastic, you’ve got energy, it’s the summer. And then three months later, you’re still [LAUGHTER] in those very first preliminary steps, because the process itself goes over about a year from start to finish, from drafting the job ad, to sending it out, to getting people to come through, to getting them into the first- round interviews, first-round interviews, to second-round interviews. It’s just a lot that goes into it. And so what were really great workshops at the beginning are distant memories where you remember sitting and looking at a screen or being in a room, and sometimes these workshops also have aspects to them that need a lot of clarification. So, b instead of saying, “Well, send your job ads out to different types of arenas,” well, why would you do that? Normally, when we send out a job ad, let’s say in English, we would send it to the Modern Language Association job call list. But who are the people who actually look at that job call list? If you look at the demographics for who’s actually MLA members, paying members, who’s going to be accessing that, you might actually find that you have people from maybe elite institutions making up the majority of the membership, or you have people from very specific geographic backgrounds, people from very specific socioeconomic backgrounds, and so without meaning to, you’re limiting the pool of people. You’re being very selective without even realizing it. So, if you want to be more expansive in who’s getting the job calls, you need to know the history behind why it ends up being that it’s so selective, and then being able to move forward. Well, where are the other places where you can send the job ads? I don’t think people are intentionally ignoring the variety of places you can put them, but sometimes it’s just a matter of knowing where to go. So, all of this is to say I created this capstone, and while I was doing it, like the good English professor [LAUGHTER] that I am, I wrote an article. And when I wrote the article, it was a mix of different types of theories and historical background and information, and I sent it to a journal. I didn’t think it was going to inherently be a knockout of the park, but I thought I would get feedback, and the feedback that I got was that it was too narrowly tailored, that creating a process to increase representation of different types of faculty in Higher Ed was too narrowly tailored of a [LAUGHTER] focus, which, it is what it is. Maybe whoever was reading it, that’s the way they thought about it. And I channeled Michelle Obama [LAUGHTER] in that moment. I was like, “Well, I don’t think that this should end here. So what do we do?” And I pitched it to what was then Lexington Books, to say, “I’m not the only one who’s thinking about these things. How do we do work that makes higher ed fulfill its promise of academic excellence for all?” And so I went to Lexington Press. They picked up a contract to create an edited collection that was going to have voices from all different fields of academia, and from there, it moved forward to the call for papers and then a wonderful collection.

Rebecca: Can you talk a little bit about how you selected contributors for your project?

Roberta: Absolutely. So I was very fortunate to, in my time at HLI, get to meet a wonderful array of academics and administrators, people who genuinely care about their campuses and the people that they serve. So one person was running the pediatrics residency for one of the SUNY campuses. Another person who runs camp programs, AOP, for one campus, and their projects were speaking to the very things that my project was speaking to. So when I got the contract, I was able to solicit submissions from people who I knew were already doing this work, and I was also able to reach out to faculty from around the campus and from Oswego, who I knew that were doing work that was very similar, and nationwide. So I reached out to administrators who I knew, who are doing this work, and doctors, people who are practicing and working in education and artists as well, and asked people if they would be willing to share. And I think I was very fortunate with the timing, because where I sent the call for papers, I got a number of people responding as well. So for instance, from Virginia Tech, there’s a center there where people who were working there created a chapter, sent it to me, and then faculty had come together as well to create a chapter and send it in. So in some cases, it was a matter of the people who I knew doing this work and also getting them to sit down. Nobody has spare time. [LAUGHTER] So being able to find people who would be able to carve time out of their schedules to sit and write and create transcripts, work on artwork, there are testimonials, and there’s also personal narratives, there’s letters. So knowing people who had some things that they would like to submit, and then being able to find other people who were also in it. And one thing that was interesting about it was that the chapters are also varied. So there’s three different sections for the book. The first one is about personal responses to what’s going on with DEI in Higher Ed in the country. The second is about pedagogy, and how do you teach? How do you even create a syllabi? And then the third is about administrative tactics and techniques that can be implemented. All of the chapters were very different, and even though one might focus on, for instance, there’s a chapter on how to create a course for Introduction to Criminal Justice. Some of the techniques that are being proffered in that chapter might seem on the surface like they’re very specific to that department, but they’re not. How do you create a syllabus that has readings that students can access if they can’t afford them? In another chapter, how do you have students introduce themselves in ways that don’t put them in front of their peers and having to say things that might be a little personal, but at the same time, ensuring that the classroom is a space where they know they will be honored and respected for their differences and that their differences won’t be treated as deficiencies. How do you go about doing that? Well, these chapters offer suggestions, and again, with the idea that we all go through training to become members of higher ed, but sometimes there are things that we just don’t know or maybe weren’t made available to us when we were working to become faculty members or administrators and so these are those opportunities to also sit back and question, “what were the thought processes behind why I did that?” [LAUGHTER] You know, “why did I go about choosing these things?” So when the chapters all came in and the artwork was coming in, I was able to sit down and really see a lot of richness in each one beyond even just kind of like that surface level read, which was really exciting actually.

John: For several decades, educational institutions at all levels have put quite a bit of emphasis on DEI initiatives. But in the last year or so, a little over a year here, we’ve seen that under very heavy attack in the federal level, and also we’ve seen quite a few attacks at the level of various states. You address this a bit in your introductory chapter, which is entitled,”It’s Not a Death Knell, It’s a Call to Arms.” Can you give us an overview of the arguments in this chapter?

Roberta: So I don’t know how everybody responded to hearing about that Supreme Court case where they decided that race could not be used as part of the decision making process for admittance to higher education. I think one of the elements of it that’s been very confusing for me has been that the Supreme Court requires that questions be and decisions being narrowly tailored and limited in scope. And the verdict that came out, that was read, the decision was very clear that this was about how race as a category is used in admissions processes. The expansion of it since then to apply to things like scholarships and to apply to programs have been, if we’ve noticed, like on the state level in most cases. So we’re seeing in like Texas, and this is not a knock on Texas, I used to live in Texas, Road Runner all the way.[LAUGHTER] But we’re seeing state level and regional level now taking up the impetus and saying, “Well, we can’t talk about things that are going to make people uncomfortable,” and that’s kind of been the language of it. And we saw it during the first administration, right? There was that executive order that you couldn’t teach things that are going to make people uncomfortable, and it’s such an interesting concept that some people are not allowed to be made to feel uncomfortable, and some people are. And the question is, “why are some allowed and some are not?” And that introductory chapter, it did recognize that we do need to grieve, because it’s a dream, right? Our ideals are wonderful things. They’re goals that we are always striving to and even if we think that we’re achieving them, we always have more that we can do, and so to have made so many strides, to have been pushing and pushing for something as basic as recognition of infrastructural inequity and inequality, and then to have it be brought up as something that is the thing that’s going to be attacked… it hurts. It genuinely hurts. And for all the people who would go to college and can see themselves as deserving of an education, and then the idea that they would be turned around to and told “No, you’re not worthy of learning.” That hurts. And so we do need to grieve, but we don’t give up. We’ve been seeing this since the ‘60s. We’ve been seeing this since the ‘20s. We’ve been seeing this since the 1880s, the 1860s, we’ve been seeing this for centuries in the United States… that we don’t give up, we just change strategy. One thing that was happening around this decision, and then that came and, as you noted, especially in the most recent months, just the constant barrage of it, but we’ve also been seeing the mechanisms of this country coming forward and saying “No, you are allowed [LAUGHTER] to have opinions, you are allowed to teach content, you are allowed to have policies to make campuses spaces of learning.” I think one thing about it has been, though, that we’ve had to also take stock of what we’ve done in the past and if DEI has been treated as a side piece or as a token gesture, yeah, some of those do end up having problems within them. So if we say, “We’re going to create scholarships for a particular community.” Well, why? What was the thought process behind that? And I think sometimes, when we lose sight of what the reasoning is behind things, then things can become token gestures, and we need to reevaluate those too. Every time we’re doing something new, that’s part of the process of being in higher education too. We need to constantly be reflecting on what we’re doing, what’s working, what’s not working. And so that first chapter, it acknowledges the pain that many no doubt feel and continue to feel about what’s going on, but also a reminder, now is the time to keep going. Now is the time to regroup, think through, self critique, self analyze, come together as community and look at what we can do to move forward, because we don’t give up on our students, we don’t give up on our programs, and that’s why [LAUGHTER] we got into these fields, I would hope, or I think, because we do believe in education as just being something that should be available to all.

Rebecca: So your chapter kind of sets the stage for the first section of the book, which contains a number of essays responding to these attacks, policy attacks. What are some of the other suggestions that are raised in this section, or those actions that you’re kind of pointing to?

Roberta: So the first section of the edited collection is very personal. And I think one of the things that gets lost in the debates about DEI in Higher Ed, is that it is very personal. It is people’s very lives. It is their futures. It is people trying to figure out who they’re going to become, and especially if you’re from communities that have historically been told, “You don’t have a future,” it’s personal. You feel it in your very flesh. It’s not abstract, it’s not a concept, it’s reality. And so if we’re going to really do the work of ensuring that Higher Ed serves everyone, we need to be very cognizant of the very human toll of getting into college and being on a campus and graduating and becoming whatever we’re gonna be in the future. So that these first entries in the book are really about setting that stage, about centering the different types of ways of knowing that people have, the different types of experiences that inform who they are when they set foot on a campus or in a classroom or in an office, and then also thinking about, what are our different responsibilities to each other? Is it just that we’re going to say, “Well, we’re all different,” or is it “We’re all different and difference isn’t deficiency. Difference means an opportunity to learn and grow and be together and shift and transform and make new places and ways of knowing and ways of thinking.” It includes lots of different contributors. So there’s artists, there’s photography, there’s poetry, there’s letters to people, there’s personal statements, and these were all designed to very much center the human experience of being in higher ed.

John: The second section, as you already mentioned, focuses on strategic curriculum. Could you share with our listeners some of the suggestions that are provided by the authors in this section?

Roberta: Yeah, and actually, I’m going to give the title of one of the chapters because it was just good, “You Can’t Heal Us if You Don’t Even Know Us: Music, Medicine, and Rethinking Pre-Med Curriculum Adaptation to Community Needs.” This particular entry was a transcript with Dr. Christophe Jackson and myself, and I was asking him… he had been working on a Fulbright, which is actually now underway. And he looks at Music and Medicine. He’s done a lot of work with the jazz musicians clinic in New Orleans. The man is brilliant, or like, when you think about brilliance embodied, that’s him. But he’s very humble, and he’s very passionate about music. He’s also very passionate about medicine, and especially for his own community, but for everybody. And while we were talking, he was sharing with me, if you were going to create a music medicine class, but fundamental to this chapter is actually thinking through the values that educators bring with them when they teach. I think all of the chapters in this section really ask faculty to take a pause and think about “what are the values that you’re bringing with you that are informing who you are and how you put together a syllabus?” And it’s not because we don’t have values or don’t know them in theory when we’re walking into class, but sometimes we get so wrapped up into making a syllabus that we don’t actually pause and think, “What do I know about the people who are coming into my classroom? What do I know about the communities that I’m actually seeking to serve?” If you don’t genuinely know, and this is to create music medicine syllabi for pre-med students… if you don’t know anything about the communities you want to serve, how are you going to serve them? Medicine is not one and done. It needs to be adjusted. It needs to be organized so that the community that’s at hand can be worked with, so that it’s not just them being told, “Oh, you have to do this, this and this,” but instead, “Do you want to be healthy? What kind of things help to be healthy in your community?” From that, we see with other chapters… so for instance, there’s one about a Master’s class for people who want to go into clinical work with mental health, again, thinking through, how do we hold ourselves accountable when we’re creating syllabi, but also in ways that allow students to engage in those practices of self reflection, so that when they leave college, if they already have a profession in mind, they can consider those or use those skills to help them along their own career paths and that is something that many of us are thinking about. You come to college, you learn all of this information, but you’re also figuring out who you want to be in the next phases of your life. And so these, I don’t know what they would be called, like, not soft skills, I’m trying to think of like those kind of invisible elements of the class where you figure out, who are you going to be, how are you going to deliver information to people? When you hear critique, how do you respond? Those are elements that are fundamental to a class but often don’t get talked about. And so when you have a chapter that asks you to consider about using self in relationship to understand another, about cultural humility and empathy through storytelling and counselor training curriculum, you’re being shown those kind of tools that you can bring into your class, even if you’re not teaching a mental health practitioner class. There are other ones that are a bit more specific in terms of field and going into what’s typically called Ethnic Studies, but it’s a pan area, right? So there’s one critically teaching Asian American Studies at an Asian American Studies-less University. So Asian American Studies covers a wide range. It’s very interdisciplinary. If you don’t have an actual department, though, that’s dedicated to that learning. So for instance, Urbana Champaign has an Asian-American studies program. If you don’t have faculty who are directly dedicated to that because you don’t have a department, how do you go about teaching it? So they actually offer a syllabi that they’ve crafted, engaging students, engaging faculty, getting workshops together, doing learning activities. So there’s one for Angel Island, where you get to learn about people’s experiences traveling to the United States and what sort of scenarios they would have encountered. These are very real learning opportunities, very tangible learning opportunities that can have major impacts on students and again, helping them see who they are in the learning process. So even if you’re not teaching Asian-American Studies, this is an assignment that you can then adapt to your own models, to model in your own classes that maybe you hadn’t thought about before or even known that that was a resource available to you. So section two tries to offer different strategies. They might look field-specific on the surface, but when you actually get to look into the chapter more deeply, you find all of these different techniques that are fun in many cases, and really thoughtful and engaging.

Rebecca: I love the wide variety of offerings that you’ve described in these sections. Now we’re fortunate to be working at a public institution in a state system that’s actively working to provide more equitable Higher Ed outcomes, but historically marginalized populations are still experiencing lower rates of persistence to graduation. What are some of the sources of these inequities?

Roberta: There was an article that just came out, and it’s these scientists trying to explain why there is intergenerational poverty. And since we have all of these things, like social programs that are in theory, designed to, quote, unquote, “get people out of it,” then it must be genetic. The article just came out in like 2026. So in 2026 we are still hearing iterations of eugenics propaganda coming out as science. Because what would make sense if we have all of these social programs that people just don’t seem to be rising and fundamental to this study was a refusal to acknowledge that intergenerational poverty is not a matter of genes. That even if there are social programs that are available, are they inherently designed to help people get out of intergenerational poverty? Or are they meant to, and I’m going to quote Martin Espada here, “teach you to shuffle forward for charity.” If they are designed to help you to live a life that you are proud of, to cultivate the skills that you wake up in the morning and are thrilled to have, my guess would be that you would then be able to engage the world around you in a way that is meaningful to you. If we’re thinking about then how education links to that, then you would be attending college, and you would be dedicated to an education that would allow you to actuate those very things. But if we’re not in that system, if we’re not in that world, if we’re in a world that’s designed to teach you to shuffle forward, then you’re not being taught to cultivate those best parts of yourself. And even if you are able to attain some of those aspects, there’s a lot behind it that just isn’t there for you. When we talk about in introductory classes, for instance, for students who are coming in, if you are from a school that… and we’re seeing this more now, and I’m not trying to throw shade on people who are all about technology… I am not… but science is still showing that children learn better with direct, one-on-one contact with a human being. But if you’re from schools that highly emphasize, or heavily emphasize the use of technology, rather than that direct one-on-one attention because of class size or whatever, those children are going to be learning differently than children who go to affluent schools where they do have lower child-to-teacher ratios. And so you start to see from very, very early ages, disparities in what children are learning. And so then you get students coming to college who genuinely want to learn, genuinely want to finish their degree. But what support mechanisms do you have there that are, one, going to actually help them get through the program in a way that’s responsible? And the next thing is, how are you going to do so in a way where the student is able to cultivate an identity that is meaningful to them? Where they’re not just a number, where they’re not just a tuition payment or whatever it is. And we’re starting to hear that economic descriptions more and more about education, and when we do that, then these students who are really struggling to try and make it through, ‘Do you see yourself as part of the campus?” There’s these discussions about belonging. We’re in campuses from an educational model that was designed centuries ago with very specific people in mind about who was going to attend them. What we’re trying to do now is retrofit them to meet these needs and that very real question that I think this book takes up is, “What are the things that we can retrofit, and what are the things that we can just imagine as new and run with those new things too?” I think when we talk about social inequalities, too, it becomes a space where people can start to feel very defensive, and that breaks down conversations, because it’s like, “Well, you know, this money is going over here, and it should be doing all of these things that make differences,” but it’s about how everyone’s involved in it. Everyone from children from rural communities where the school year is dependent on harvest season, to children whose families move because of harvest season, to people who are veterans, to people who are single parents and trying to get degrees so that they can get jobs that will hopefully pay so that they can send their kids to a better school, and that kind of process. So when we talk about these social inequalities and how they show up in college settings, we’re talking about this large, interconnected, intertwined ball of threads and strings, and pulling at one or the other might not be the thing that helps a student get through maybe all of them are. But I think this book offers some insights. When you have students who need more assistance, what sort of things can we do to offer that help in the classroom, and then also administratively?

John: So students come in with different backgrounds because of the quality of the schools and differences in parents’ education and other things which affect where students start at when they enter the school system, and we have a lot of systemic inequality. But, when we have the students coming into our classes, what can faculty do to help reduce some of these equity gaps in outcomes, to create more of a sense of belonging and to help all students be more successful?

Roberta: So read Section two of this book. [LAUGHTER] I mean, some of the things are about very technical pieces, So like, how are things laid out, what types of resources are available with the syllabus and so on. But then there are sometimes things that are less obvious, and they come from the things that we were taught when we were getting our educations that we replicate. When we have a professor we like, we replicate what they did, because it obviously worked. But I think there is some privileging. For instance, reading. Something as basic as that, but also that students are bringing with them different types of knowledge, different types of critical ways of knowing, and that many times, those aren’t being represented in the content of the classes, in the curriculum, because we’ve been taught to focus on one particular thing or one particular way of knowing. And here I’m thinking, this isn’t in the book, but just if I’m a student and I’m not used to having math classes where I see any of the things I care about represented, and all of a sudden I’m being shown how math is actually important in all of these different realms of my life taught from a way that my community speaks, then I’m going to learn it differently than if I’m shown something on the board and then somebody steps away. The ways that I’m going to engage the space, the sort of questions, and this is from section two, now, how do you just even set out the room so that when students come in, they have space to sit down? How do you go about offering assignments? What sort of options do you have for them? So if you offer, let’s say if you have a reading list, and you are requiring students to purchase books and they have to have physical books, when do the grants that help them purchase books come out? If you’re setting them a text that they need to buy and they need to be reading before that grant comes out, they can’t afford the book, that’s why they’re getting the grant. So maybe adjusting when you’re going to start assigning texts that they need to purchase and front loading things like articles that maybe you can give online or things that you can print and give out to them. Simple adjustment, doesn’t call anyone out, but takes into account that some of the students in the class might very well only be able to buy books as soon as that grant comes through on the first Friday of the semester. In other cases, things like having policies that allow students to step out of the class in the event that something becomes triggering for them, not knowing if students have certain types of traumatic experiences in their histories. So saying, “If you need to leave for 15 minutes, step out of the room for 15 minutes, come back in, we have resources available to you.” Things like having, on the campus itself… so this isn’t so much controlled by faculty, but administratively… food kitchens where students who might be experiencing difficulties being able to purchase food, where they can go and get items that they need. Things like professional development workshops on campus. So students who are the first in their families to be graduating college might be the first in their families to be going for these professional level careers. Do they know how to choose a suit that fits? That might sound real simple to some people, like, “Yeah, you don’t want gapping around the pockets, and the shirt has to fall in a certain way.” But if this isn’t your family, you have no idea, and it can be very intimidating to ask for help. So does the campus offer those kinds of services? If they offer professional level clothing, do they offer the other part of it that maybe shows students these other skills that we take for granted as everybody having, but that a lot of students might not have, and so being able to access that, and in a way that doesn’t call them out, that doesn’t act as if it’s charity, but instead, this is part of the experience, and everyone should have it.

Rebecca: Really appreciate, as a designer, you talking about the difference between designing for equity in the s tart versus retrofitting something that was definitely not designed with equity in mind at the back end, right? Those experiences are different, our ability to create equitable experiences are actually quite different under those different circumstances. One of the things that you were just talking about points to the need that faculty have to understand some of the other systems that exist that are outside of the curriculum or outside of their subject matter, like the timing of when grants might be available, or how financial aid works,[LAUGHTER] because those actually have significant impact on the experiences of students at our institutions, and we can make design choices that think about some of those things that are in place, that maybe aren’t as easy to change, or they certainly aren’t going to change at the same speed [LAUGHTER] that we can adapt or adjust a class. I really appreciate that thought. Can you talk a little bit more about, maybe the responsibility faculty might want to take for better understanding some of these other systems, so that they can account for things like this?

Roberta: So it’s a hard balance, right? Because, on the one hand, and this is something I’m very cognizant of, I have curriculum that I have to teach, and I have to make sure that I deliver it accurately and responsibly. It’s easy to get lost in that and we have all of these other pressures. Because teaching alone isn’t it. There’s teaching, there’s service, there’s scholarship, and there’s conferences, and sometimes you get to the end of the day and spend 13 hours, and you know that there’s more [LAUGHTER] for the next day. So I think part of this is not so much adding to the plate, but instead shifting. And I’ve been hearing about the use of the language of shifting. How are we just going to shift over rather than asking faculty to have these extra heavy loads when there’s already so much on the plate? And I think that part of that can be done using mechanisms that we already have. So things like academic affairs retreats, professional development workshops that our campuses offer, even when we go to conferences or things like that. But having people, instead of saying, “Here’s a list of things you have to put on your syllabus,” and then moving on, having opportunities for, for instance, financial aid to come in and meet with faculty, and maybe it’s more of there’s a lot of us, [LAUGHTER] there’s few of them, there’s more of us. So having them come to like department meetings and actually walking us through when certain things will hit and when they don’t. I know about, for instance, a grant for books, because my first semester on campus, students told me about it. Before that, and I know we’re not supposed to do this, but I would just say, “You need a copy of the reading? Here’s my book. Do what you need to do. Just give me the book back before class, so that I have time to prepare.” And you know, they’d be photocopying or taking photos with their phones. But then they told me about this grant, and I was like, “Well, that’s essential to know.” [LAUGHTER] If you can’t buy the book, you can’t buy the book. So then looking at library resources, showing them how to get access to books from interlibrary loan if they’re like, “I genuinely cannot afford this book.” What can you get through Interlibrary Loan? What sort of resources do we have? So having workshops like that with faculty can be very helpful, but it has to be timed. So, you know, we have due dates as well. So having syllabi available by a certain date means that we have to be thinking about spring semester like the year before. So it’s about finding those timings that work with faculty schedules and requirements from the campus itself, and offering those and also, I think the importance of professional development time for faculty, I think across the nation, is kind of hard to find time for right now, but it’s a necessity. If we can sit down and say, “Okay, here are the actual skills that I want them to have? What are the variety of fun things that go along with those?” If I want them to be considering how to find an argument in a poem, I am not a technology person, so bear with me, can I have them distill it down to a meme? (I just learned about memes not too long ago.) And then, “How do I get them to work with that?” So this is using their own sensibilities, drawing from their own cultural knowledges, their own backgrounds, thinking through what sort of resources they have available to them. They’re still going to know how to be able to distill an argument. They’re still going to be able to identify and articulate what is it this person wants me to get and how are they trying to persuade me, but doing so in a manner that allows them to cultivate their own knowledges and not saying, “Well, this is the only way to do it. This is the only option that we have.” But instead offering these varieties. Now, as an English professor, I am always going to end up coming back to the written word, and that’s okay, there’s nothing wrong with that. But what are the flexibilities that are available around that? That students can engage? What different angles can we offer for students to come into the conversation from, while still holding standards and working with students to find that they are very capable of achieving these things? I’m thinking of the book, Nuyorganics, and it’s this brilliant book… it came out a few years back… but about having students cultivate their cultural knowledges and organic intellectualism, combining that to create different types of assignments in the classroom that then move forward. But we need time to be able to do this. And so, in a perfect world, we would have time to do it. So maybe this is something then, that individual departments can start thinking through. If this matters to us, if it’s not a token gesture that we want academic excellence for all, let’s create times and some of the stuff that’s mandatory, like meetings or whatever the case may be, where everybody gets together and actually have somebody come in as a guest and speak to us about some of the things that they’re doing that work, or maybe some processes for finding things that might work for them. I think key to this all too, though, is that it’s not about not making standards or things for students, but instead helping them cultivate the very real skills that they need for success. And that’s part of the conversation too and I think going back to the question about students finding ways to make it through college versus some who are not, this is part of that whole complex system. What resources do they have, and do they know how to, from their own lens and from their own styles, engage these? That there isn’t just one way of going about things or one way of doing it that’s correct, but all these varieties that are available to them.

John: As Rebecca noted, we’re lucky to live in a state where there is still support for diversity, equity, and inclusion initiatives and attempts to try to make things work better for all students, but we do see a number of states that are imposing some really serious restrictions on what people are allowed to teach. They’re redefining our history, redefining science, and limiting what can be talked about in terms of many issues. What advice would you give to faculty who are trying to help students in that environment?

Roberta: I think the first thing would be, know the law and not the law as you’re being told it’s the law, but what is the actual letter of the law. If you know the letter of the law, if you know what it actually says, and you have a cohort of people that similarly know what it actually says, you can make decisions about your response rather than being caught in the moment and having to react. And I think that one struggle people are having is that they’re being put into situations where they’re having to react on the spot. And it’s not that their reactions are bad. They’re human, and what they’re responding to [LAUGHTER] in many cases just doesn’t make sense. I will give them that. But we also have to acknowledge that the paradigm has shifted, and we cannot respond the way that we thought it worked when it’s already shifted. We have to know what’s happening now and what is our relationship to that. I heard a statistic recently about people’s desire for their children to go to college and get degrees, and, you know, it’s lower than it was 20 years ago. That’s about faith in education and faith in the learning process, and in states where people seem to be vilified for wanting to give education books, being thrown away, it’s hard to maintain faith in the very things that we know in our core are right, which is that you don’t discriminate against people because of their race, their ethnicity, their socioeconomic backgrounds, their gender, their sexuality, and disability. And we’re thinking about different ways of knowing. We know this. And I think sometimes the small group of people that are shouting the loudest seem to be the ones that make up the majority, and they don’t. We’re seeing pushes against restriction of political thought. We’re seeing pushes that are being successful, against the attempt to restrict access of education to certain communities. The momentum has to maintain though, we can’t back down from it, and we have to also remember that we need to remind people we are supporting them, that we are here for them, that we will do what we can to support them, that we have not given up the fight, right? It’s not a death knell. It is a call to arms, and we are ready. We might need breaks. [LAUGHTER] Some of us might need to rest every now and again, and that’s totally fine, but we don’t give up. We keep going, and we will continue to be supportive.

John: In line with what you’ve just suggested, back in 1853, Theodore Parker said that “The arc of the moral universe is long, but it bends towards justice.” And this is a quote that was frequently repeated by both Martin Luther King and by President Obama. Do you think we’re going to get back on a better path in the near future?

Roberta: There’s a quote from a book called King Solomon’s Mines, British fiction from I guess a century almost now, ago. And the book is very problematic, but there’s a line in it that goes, “Where there is life, there is hope.” And as much as the book is super messed up, and I’m not advocating anyone read it, I take great comfort in that, that we always have the ability to move forward, that if there is life anywhere, that we can always continue to cultivate the best parts of ourselves to make the world a better place and I think for a long time, we haven’t necessarily been encouraged to cultivate those best parts of ourselves, when you turn on the media, when you turn on the television, whatever it might be, seeing people screaming at each other, seeing people waving flags in each other’s faces, on both sides. And we think about like the polarization of the United States, this has gone on, you know, it’s older than me. But that doesn’t mean there aren’t those of us who really believe in education. That really believe in the ability to learn and grow and find those better parts of ourselves and be open to change. And change is not easy, change is difficult. It hurts. When we grow, we go through growth spurts and our bodies hurt. We grow teeth and our gums hurt, but it’s okay, because on the other side of that, growth is something very real. And right now, we are in a space of growth, and I turn to Gloria Anzaldúa here, because I think about the path to “conocimiento,” which means the path to coming to consciousness. And it goes up, it goes down, it goes left, it goes right, it spirals, and sometimes you think you’ve got it, and nope, you’re right at the beginning again. But if you can engage the process, you will start coming into these movements of complexity and being able to figure out new realities for yourself. I do think that things will get better. I don’t know how long it will take. I would like to say tomorrow, and maybe for some of us it will be, apparently, the planets just realigned themselves last week, and I take great hope in that. [LAUGHTER] But genuinely, I do think that there is hope for the future. When I hear some of the things that my students talk about… I just went through midterms, and seeing some of these midterms just renews your faith in everything, because you’re like, “Thank you. Thank you for believing you could do something that was different. Thank you for trusting the process and yourself enough to engage in this, even if it was new and scary and different.” It’s okay to cultivate those parts of their imaginations and creativity in combination with critical thinking. I think one of the major attacks right now is on critical thinking skills. We don’t give up on those. We hunker down with them. That might make us dangerous, but it also means that we know how to ask good questions, and it’s going to be those people who are able to ask good questions that are going to lead us into the future. I think about Brenda Marie Osbey. She was the poet laureate of Louisiana a few years back, and I got to meet her one time, and she said, “the job of the artist isn’t to answer the question. The job of the artist is to ask them and then to follow these questions through all of their different pathways and find all these nuances and things that we weren’t thinking about or things that we weren’t considering and bringing those to light.” Yeah, that’s it, that ability to think, the ability to create, the ability to continue moving. We do have a lot of pain that we haven’t dealt with, centuries in the making that we do have to deal with, and maybe that’s part of why we’re in this moment now. But that doesn’t mean we can’t come out the other side of it. We just have to have faith that there is another side of it, and I genuinely believe there is.

Rebecca: Given that John has already asked about your crystal ball. I’ll ask a follow up. We always end by asking, what’s next? It could be personally, professionally, the book, any way you want to spin it.

Roberta: So I have a book chapter coming out in a collection called ¿Y Yo También?, and it’s about Latinas and the Me Too movement. And it’s got creative pieces in it, it’s got scholarly works in it, but it’s designed so that anyone can read it, which is awesome, because sometimes we have these very jargon laden conversations about people’s very real experiences that can make it hard for everyone to join in the conversation. So I love this book. It’s coming out with Rutgers University Press this coming fall. The faculty member is in New York, her name is Melissa, and again, coming out this fall. I have a second monograph that I just finished called, But is it sexy? that looks at representation of eroticism in Puerto Rican women’s literature, which was incredible to get to research and write and I’m looking forward to that. Moving forward, I’m going to be presenting at NADOHE, which is the National Association of Diversity Officers in Higher Ed at the end of March. And then next spring, I get to teach poetry, which I’m excited about. And then this semester, I have two more guest artists coming as part of a larger series. Denise Chávez will be joining us, as well as Melissa Rivero at the end of the semester. So these are all major moments of excitement, and I very much look forward to.

John: Well, thank you. It was great talking to you, and I hope your book makes an impact on people.

Roberta: Thank you. Thank you very much.

Rebecca: Yeah, thank you for all your work.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]

437. Impostor Phenomenon

Impostor phenomena can deter college students, especially students from historically underrepresented groups, from pursuing majors in STEM disciplines. In this episode, Sara Kien joins us to discuss strategies that can reduce imposter phenomena and reduce equity gaps in student success.

Sara is an Associate Teaching Professor at Northern Arizona University. She has a PhD in cognitive psychology and recently completed a masters degree in information and data science. Sara is an award winning educator with over 20 years of experience and the author of Data Science and AI in Psychology, an interactive eTextbook on data science, big data, and machine learning in psychology.

Show Notes

Transcript

Rebecca: Impostor phenomena can deter college students, especially students from historically underrepresented groups, from pursuing majors in STEM disciplines. In this episode, we discuss strategies that one faculty member has used to reduce impostor phenomena and reduce equity gaps in student success.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

John: Our guest today is Sara Kien. Sara is an Associate Teaching Professor at Northern Arizona University. She has a PhD in cognitive psychology and recently completed a masters degree in information and data science. Sara is an award winning educator with over 20 years of experience and the author of Data Science and AI in Psychology, an interactive eTextbook on data science, big data, and machine learning in psychology. Welcome Sara.

Sara: Thank you so much. It’s great to be here. Thank you for having me.

John: Thanks for joining us.

Rebecca: Today’s teas are:… Sara, are you drinking tea with us today?

Sara: I am. I was so excited about this part of the podcast. This tea, I have to say, is pretty legit. I love tea, and I put time and effort into tea, yeah, so I was really excited about this. So my tea comes from a local company in the southwest called Old Barrel Tea Company, and so we have one of their flagship stores here in Flagstaff, Arizona, which is where Northern Arizona University is located. And so they just have a wide range of tea options. And so this tea today, I chose berry, and then I even have some special honey, like oak-infused honey added to this tea. And so I was just really excited to get my tea ready and to brag about my tea, and also to plug the Old Barrel Tea Company, because they’re fantastic. and the oak

John: And the oak-infused honey certainly fits with the old barrel, [LAUGHTER] nicely.

Sara: Yeah.

Rebecca: Yeah, it sounds right up. John’s alley.

Sara: Wonderful.

Rebecca: Today I have Scottish Breakfast tea.

Sara: Hmmm

John: Good. I had that a couple times yesterday, but today I have a ginger peach green tea.

Sara: Oh yum.

John: We’ve invited you here today to discuss your work addressing impostor phenomenon and your work in redesigning data science classes in psychology. What does the data suggest about the prevalence of impostor phenomenon among college students?

Sara: That’s a great question. It’s also a bit of a complicated question, because it really depends on how impostor phenomenon is measured, and it also really depends on the context. So just to provide a little background regarding this construct, impostor phenomenon, which is also commonly known as impostor syndrome… so I think a lot of folks will be familiar with that terminology… was actually coined in 1978 by Pauline Rose Clance and Suzanne Imes as part of their work examining or investigating highly successful women who had a really difficult time internalizing their success. And so at that time, they coined the term impostor syndrome, and over the years, increasingly, the research has suggested that impostor syndrome, or now as we refer to it, impostor phenomenon is highly prevalent. It’s quite pervasive, actually, with recent findings suggesting that, in terms of just generalized impostor phenomenon, rates might be high as 80% in the population of individuals experiencing a sense of impostorism. And so what is impostor phenomenon? What are some of the defining features or characteristics? Currently the field identifies three elements. So the first is a really intense or chronic feeling of self doubt in spite of overwhelming evidence of achievement. So really just a belief that you’re a fraud. That’s really the heart of impostor, right? That I’m an impostor, that I’m a fraud, that I don’t belong here, that I’m here by accident. Everybody else belongs here, but I don’t. And so that second element, like that I’m here by accident, is discounting our success, or believing that our success is undeserved, and that we attribute our success to factors other than ability, so luck, for example, or maybe in the case of academics, a lenient professor. So I received an A in that course because my professor is really lenient and it’s just an easy course. Or I just worked harder than everyone else, but everybody else just has, like, natural ability that I lack. And again, I just really want to emphasize that it’s not just any feeling of self doubt, but really a feeling of self doubt in the face of conflicting evidence suggesting otherwise. So like in many cases, in spite of overwhelming achievement. And so how can we experience such levels of self doubt that contradicts the evidence, by discounting the evidence. And then the third element is just a fear of exposure. So if I’m a fraud and I don’t belong and I’m an impostor, then I’m just constantly sort of hyper vigilant about covering my tracks, and very concerned about being exposed as a fraud. As I mentioned, there’s recent evidence to suggest that rates of academic impostor phenomenon can be as high as 80% in the general population, and for this reason, recently, researchers have moved away from “impostor syndrome” as a relevant term to “impostor phenomenon,” because that level of prevalence really suggests potentially more systemic issues, rather than individual level factors. So syndrome suggests that there are issues at the level of the individual. In addition, it’s not a clinical diagnosis, syndrome really often refers to something that’s more clinical in nature. This is a common set of thoughts and feelings that are experienced by many individuals, quite commonly. With respect to academia, more specifically, the estimates for the prevalence of academic impostor phenomenon vary quite widely, again, often depending on how it’s measured. So, in some cases, the measurement might just include feelings of impostorism. But in other cases, measures might include all three defining elements that I mentioned earlier. And really one of the issues has been that within academia, or academics, more specifically, we haven’t had a relevant measure of academic impostor phenomenon. And so the evidence suggests that the rates range from maybe 20% to 50% or higher, depending on the degree program, depending on the context. And so in degree programs that tend to be more competitive, where there’s an emphasis on like hyper-productivity and the stakes are really high, like in medicine, for example, we see higher levels of impostorism. And again, that just highlights potentially systemic level issues, system level processes that are contributing to how individuals are experiencing their success and how they’re interpreting their experience within academia. So, fortunately, recently, some of my colleagues have developed an academic impostor phenomenon measure. So Valerie Todd and David Mcilroy published a validated measure of academic impostor phenomenon in 2025. Recently, as part of a joint effort within that collaborative team, we have been applying that specific measure in a program of research that’s examining academic impostor phenomenon. We’re very excited about the potential to examine rates of impostor phenomenon in the academic context, more specifically. And then in our case, as a research team, we’re all psychologists, so we’re starting with psychology majors and exploring rates of impostor phenomenon within the field of psychology. I guess one thing I could add, actually, before I say a little bit more about our program of research with respect to the validated measure that was recently developed by Todd and Mcilroy, that that measure is available for anybody who’s interested in the Journal of Current Psychology. And then the other thing I wanted to mention, in terms of addressing prevalence within academia and the call for a more validated measure, there’s an excellent review of the literature that was published in 2023 by Dana Ménard and Laura Chittle in the journal Review of Education. And so for anybody who’s interested in more details regarding prevalence and measurement, that’s a really excellent review.

Rebecca: It’s exciting to hear that there’s new measurement tools available, because even in casual conversation with students, in my context, it’s orientation for all the graduate students at our institution, they all easily say, “Yes, I know what that is. [LAUGHTER] I’ve had experience with that.” And when we bring it up and try to address it as a group, there’s a really high affect towards that in acknowledgement that that’s an important thing that we’re addressing in our orientation for these students.

Sara: Exactly. So that’s such a great point, because that actually leads to the next thing that I wanted to say. But just to address that specifically, as we’ve been developing this program of research, the number of students who are interested in getting involved in the research, either as participants or as undergraduate/graduate level researchers, or even just colleagues, like other faculty. So this is pervasive throughout academia, feelings of impostorism and self doubt. In spite of academic achievement. The number of individuals who want to get involved in this work really is quite overwhelming. For students. It’s very relevant, especially within the field of psychology, as I’m sure is the case in other fields, students really want to make a difference, and they’re very familiar with their experience and the experience of their peers, and they want to get involved in work that they think will be supportive and help to support wellbeing among their peers more generally. And the same is true for faculty. Of course, faculty care about student success and want to do everything they can to support students and so learning more about this phenomenon and the factors that predict this phenomenon, or intervention strategies and even to support their colleagues or even help to enhance their own wellbeing within the context of their career. It’s just really relevant. It’s very personally relevant for many folks in academia. So this research team includes Valerie Todd and David Mcilroy, who are both at institutions in the United Kingdom. So this is part of an international collaboration, but also Jennifer Coleman at Western New Mexico University and Ivette Merced at Irvine Valley College. We’ve started investigating rates or prevalence of impostor phenomenon among psych majors with this new tool, and what we found is that, as you just mentioned earlier, actually the majority of students report some level of impostor phenomenon. And then what’s also interesting with respect to prevalence, and so I mentioned that it’s a little complicated because it turns out it’s context specific. As part of this work, I’ve actually been leading one line of research in this larger program that’s focused on supporting students, supporting psych majors in more STEM-focused courses as a part of their psychology degree program. So we contextualized this tool to measure academic impostor phenomenon in relation to statistics, more specifically, or research methods more specifically, or psychology in general, in addition to the more generalized measure. And what we found is statistically significant differences in average scores of academic impostor phenomenon depending on context. For psych majors, academic impostor phenomenon in relation to statistics scoring significantly higher than other types of AIP. So again, what’s the prevalence? It really depends on how we measure it. It depends on the context, it depends on the domain, and we’re seeing like just a growing body of research and literature in this area. So I think it’ll be really interesting to continue exploring this question moving forward.

John: So you mentioned some ways in which it varies. You mentioned in statistics classes, for example, there seems to be higher rates. You mentioned earlier that in the more competitive fields, there seems to be more. What other factors seem to result in higher levels of impostorism.

Sara: So, in terms of the factors that predict impostorism, there are a few individual level factors, but we’re seeing increasingly that the individual level factors really interact with what’s happening more at the systems level, with systemic factors. Some predictors include some personality characteristics. There’s some evidence to suggest that neuroticism, for example, predicts impostor phenomenon more generally, as well as academic impostor phenomenon to the extent that that’s been measured in academic context. Perfectionism is strongly correlated with academic impostor phenomenon. We also see other correlates. So for example, academic impostor phenomenon, and impostor phenomenon more generally, is associated with mental health issues like depression and anxiety, psychological distress, burnout. But one thing to note here, in addressing these correlates and the factors that predict academic impostor phenomenon, is there’s really a lack of research that investigates causality. So it’s difficult to know, for example, whether feelings of impostor phenomenon give rise to perfectionism or lower self esteem, which is another correlate of impostor phenomenon, or whether lower self esteem and perfectionism predispose individuals to higher levels of impostor phenomenon. So it’s hard to discern the nature of that relationship, but some other factors as we start thinking about like, “Well, what’s happening at the individual level versus a more systemic level?” There’s been a body of work examining demographic differences in impostor phenomenon. So Kevin Cokley at the University of Texas at Austin has been studying impostor phenomenon in academic contexts for over 10 years, and has published some really interesting work in this area, and also in the area of mental health implications of impostor phenomenon. And again, that review that I mentioned earlier, the Ménard and Chittle review, published in 2023, does a really nice job of highlighting essentially what is intersectionality, or the interactive nature of individual level variables and what’s happening at the systems level. So with respect to demographic factors, a number of researchers have explored group differences between individuals who are historically minoritized in certain settings or pathways, and examined variability among those populations. And ultimately, the findings are mixed, with some research suggesting that there are group differences, for example, gender differences or differences based on race or ethnicity, while other research suggesting that there are no group differences. And so follow up research has revealed that with respect to group differences, the answer is, “it depends.” So, there aren’t just inherent differences in academic impostor phenomenon across demographic groups, with certain minoritized groups, for example, Women in Data Science focused degree programs or computer science focused degree programs. In the field of data science, for example, women only make up 20 to 25% of all data scientists. So in fields where women are historically minoritized or are underrepresented, we don’t necessarily see higher levels of academic impostor phenomenon among women. What matters is the context. So whether the context that women are in highlights those disparities. So is there evidence of racial discrimination or gender discrimination in these environments? Is there evidence of prejudice? Are there sufficient role models who can serve in a mentoring capacity for individuals who might be underrepresented within a particular industry or domain, and is there access to representation? In addition, often environments that are more competitive in nature tend to exacerbate impostor phenomenon for individuals who might be historically minoritized or underrepresented in certain domains. And so really, what the research suggests is that academic impostor phenomenon may serve as a mediator or a mechanism by which prejudice and discrimination underrepresentation, hyper productivity and competitiveness can impact mental health. So without that context, group differences in impostor phenomenon may be similar, but if you add those stressors, then we might see an exacerbation of impostor phenomenon, in the sense of: “I don’t belong here. I don’t belong. I don’t fit in. I don’t know how I got here. I’m at risk of being exposed for my lack of ability,” which then can have implications for mental health and for future outcomes.

Rebecca: You’ve talked a bit about the prevalence and that it’s pretty common that people have some of these feelings. What are the consequences if students experience impostor phenomenon in their persistence?

Sara: The consequences can be widespread and cascading, unfortunately, and different people handle the experience of impostor phenomenon in different ways. Generally speaking, the research suggests that some of the most prevalent or pervasive kinds of consequences include effects on mental health… so, depression, anxiety, psychological distress, burnout. There is also a relationship with lower self esteem, lower academic self confidence or self efficacy, so your belief in your ability, which aligns well with those three elements of impostor phenomenon… maladaptive perfectionism, so a kind of perfectionism in which you set almost unattainable standards and goals which can exacerbate feelings of distress and burnout and exhaustion. And in turn, these mental health struggles can lead to unfortunate outcomes, for example, procrastination, like, how do we cope with these kinds of mental health issues, right? And how do we cope with these distressing thoughts and feelings related to self doubt? So procrastination, avoidance, and withdrawing can lead to delayed graduation. In the case of students, we might change degree programs. In the case of faculty, we might change careers. We might leave academia and pivot and pursue a different line of work. Sometimes students are at risk of dropping out. Another unfortunate outcome that can occur is a type of self sabotage, in which students become less risk taking because beliefs about their lack of ability, in other words, are less likely to pursue certain scholarship opportunities, or maybe less likely to pursue graduate school, or, in the case of professionals within academia, are less likely to pursue promotion. So that’s one kind of consequence or outcome, another outcome related to perfectionism. And then what we see also, in relation to certain personality traits like conscientiousness, is that we see on the flip side, some individuals compensate over-preparation, which can be a mechanism leading to exhaustion and burnout. So then again, we see, in terms of the impact on academic performance like GPA, the findings are mixed because many individuals who are experiencing impostor phenomenon overcompensate through over-preparation and perfectionism, so they’re still dealing with the mental health struggles associated with impostor phenomenon, but because of a fear of being exposed, they’re working harder than anyone else to try to hide what they perceive as their lack of ability. The language I’m using is like “t\They’re doing this, [LAUGHTER] you know, this is what they do,” but just as full disclosure, most of us are familiar with this phenomenon. So even for myself, on a daily basis, I’m challenged with feelings of impostorism. Even preparing for this podcast, I have a perception that there’s a certain level of expertise that I should be demonstrating as part of this podcast interview, have self doubt at times about my level of expertise and whether I can communicate effectively. For me, I fall on the more perfectionist side of the equation, so that I’m at risk of over-preparing and starting to feel self doubt about whether I can cover everything that I want to cover. A little later, we’ll talk about strategies and intervention for addressing feelings of impostor phenomenon. But I have to take a step back and recognize what’s happening and reframe my experience, and just to highlight that this is a common experience, and even for those of us, or maybe even especially for those of us who are conducting research in this area, we’re motivated by similar kinds of experiences that we’ve had that have impacted us throughout our educational journey or throughout our career. So with respect to students, for educators who really care about students and who are really student centered, it’s really important to consider the mental health struggles that they might be experiencing and the ways in which those could be impacting their performance in the classroom as a function of academic impostor phenomenon, including whether students participate in classroom discussions or how engaged they are in group work. If they are concerned about a sense of belonging, whether they belong, they might feel less comfortable sharing or engaging with other students, with their peers, and in particular, if they feel that there’s risk of being exposed as a fraud. So in many cases, a student who may seem withdrawn isn’t necessarily disinterested or uninterested in the course material, they might be dealing with significant feelings of self doubt, fear of exposure, that are leading to mental health struggles, all of which might be associated with their behavior in the classroom.

John: A while back, we interviewed Peter Arcidiacono, who was one of several authors of a study that looked at the attrition rates from students in STEM majors. In particular, what they found in the study was that women, on average, did better in introductory STEM courses, yet they were more likely to not pursue a major in it, even though they were interested in a major, in large part because of the lower grades received in STEM classes. Is it likely, perhaps, that impostorism may be one of the factors where the signal of lower grades in some disciplines may encourage some people to leave the discipline, especially if they’re already underrepresented in those areas.

Sara: Yeah, absolutely. impostor phenomenon could be one of probably several factors that are relevant, like one of the things that unfortunately occurs in more competitive degree programs, like STEM degree programs, a kind of a culture and environment where showing struggle can be penalized, where there’s additional pressure to maintain a perfect facade. If an individual is from a historically minoritized background with respect to that degree program or that domain, and is experiencing a fear of exposure for a lack of ability, may be less likely to reach out for support, may be less likely to engage in help seeking behaviors where they share openly about their concerns and their doubt and their struggle, and therefore are less likely to receive support, both in terms of mental health, but also academically. And then, as I mentioned earlier, what are the factors that predict persistence. What helps the student to be more likely to persist and to follow their interests and to follow their passion? Self efficacy is a strong correlate. So belief in your abilities, which is undermined by impostor phenomenon… faculty support which is less likely to occur if students are afraid of being exposed, and if the culture, as I mentioned, emphasizes projecting an image of success, so less likely to access faculty support if we feel penalized for sharing our struggles. Aso, you know, one major issue with respect to impostor phenomenon is that we don’t talk about it enough. It’s such a relief to hear that more institutions are introducing these discussions for incoming classes of students, because it’s not just what students can be doing, what faculty can be doing, but really what needs to be happening at the institutional level, where we’re normalizing impostor phenomenon so that students feel like they’re not alone in these experiences, and they feel more comfortable reaching out for support and sharing their struggles, especially in highly competitive contexts. For students who start to experience any type of failure, who are internalizing their failure, but failing to acknowledge their success and maybe even essentializing that failure as an indicator of lack of ability, those failures are pretty high-stakes situations. For those students, that’s an indicator of lack of ability that suggests that you’re not cut out for that field or that discipline. In those more competitive environments, it is the case that grades and research productivity and networking success are pretty high stakes, so early evidence of failure can feel catastrophic in those types of competitive environments where the stakes are so high. And again, if we had more opportunities to normalize the experience, more faculty support around these issues, potentially students would feel more comfortable reaching out and getting the support they need early. I really want to emphasize that it’s not students who are self selecting out. It’s really systemic, which is why, at an institutional level, we need to provide these supports. Without an institutional support system, it’s really the system pushing students out, especially students who are historically underrepresented, who maybe also feel lack of role models that they can reach out to, or lack of representation, which exacerbates their experience of impostor phenomenon.

Rebecca: You’ve talked a bit about the importance of normalizing impostor phenomenon as a way of systemically starting to address some of these issues, because if more of us in leadership roles or in an educator role are also modeling that we experience this too, then it becomes less scary for a student to also admit those same experiences. What are some of the strategies that you’re using in your own classrooms, to start to mitigate the feelings of impostor phenomenon and the potential outcomes that can result?

Sara: That’s a great question. I feel like there are some strategies that I’ve been implementing for several years, and I also continue to improve in my ability to provide support in this area. Normalizing, as I mentioned, is a really important one, and we can also model our own impostor phenomenon experience in an effort to normalize. And what I find is that students experience great relief in learning that an individual who’s in a position that they might aspire towards also has experienced similar kinds of feelings. And really, what I found is that it helps to really open students up, and then students are more likely to share some of their own experiences of self doubt and concern. In my case, I’m teaching research methods and data science courses within the field of psychology, and the statistics and research methods courses for psych majors tend to be the most dreaded courses. And as a woman within the field of psychology, teaching data science, where women are underrepresented by and large (even in the subfield of quantitative psychology, at the upper levels, we see an under representation of women), I think it provides additional support for students with diverse gender identities to relate, in particular, to a role model who is underrepresented with respect to that particular domain or within that field or subfield. And so I do as much as I can to just share openly and honestly, to allow myself to be vulnerable in a public setting with students. For me personally, that’s required that I do my own work in addressing my feelings of self doubt and trying to understand the source of those feelings. Then that leads to the second highly effective strategy, which is cognitive restructuring or reframing. It’s quite normal to have thoughts and feelings related to self doubt, even if we understand the source of those thoughts and feelings, it’s still common for us to experience those thoughts and feelings, but we don’t necessarily need to attach ourselves to those thoughts and feelings. So reframing those experiences when we notice them can be highly effective, and there are a few different strategies for doing that. Mindfulness meditation is really helpful in becoming increasingly aware of automatic thoughts and emotions that arise, and becoming aware of those thoughts and emotions in a non-judgmental way. So mindfulness meditation is often a strategy that’s suggested in relation to cognitive reframing, but once we notice those thoughts and feelings, we can apply a new frame, for example, a growth-mindset frame. One thing I should emphasize is that there’s actually some evidence to suggest that the outcomes associated with impostor phenomenon are not necessarily negative, that there are actually some positive outcomes associated with impostor phenomenon. For many of us, if we experience feelings of self doubt, it can be a motivator. It can motivate us to learn more and grow in our abilities and to work harder. So when we experience feelings of self doubt, we can actually reframe even that impostor phenomenon from a growth-mindset perspective, like these feelings are just like my mind and body’s way of helping me to feel motivated. Of course, if they become maladaptive and start giving rise to depression and anxiety, then it’s important to start addressing those specific thoughts. More specifically, one example is if we’re feeling self doubt and concern about our ability in relation to any academic task or a particular academic course. Instead of identifying a specific end result that relates to social comparison, like I need to be at a particular level, we can reframe our experiences just in a perspective of growth. You know, I’m going to put effort into this activity that I care about, and my goal is to simply continue growing and developing in my experience, regardless of standards of success that are presented within a particular field or within a particular profession, so to reframe in terms of like interest and growth and effort, rather than essentialized abilities that have a particular end goal. One helpful approach to cognitive reframing is to reframe our thoughts and emotions in terms of growth mindset. So a growth mindset emphasizes effort and improvement, even in the face of failure as a function of effort. So really understanding that our abilities grow out of interest, passion and effort. In contrast, a perspective of traits or abilities as fixed suggests that these traits and abilities are innate, that we’re born with particular traits and abilities, so that failure reflects a lack of ability. Really, failure is an opportunity to continue to learn and grow, and imagine that we could continue to improve as a function of effort, even in the face of failure. So that would be an example of cognitive reframing in relation to growth mindset. And research has shown that growth mindset, in particular, is a really helpful approach to cognitive reframing.

John: Are there other things at the institutional level that can be done to reduce the impact of impostor phenomenon?

Sara: Yeah, and actually, I can say a few more things about instructor-level support. So in addition to normalizing and cognitive reframing, other approaches that are helpful that I also try to encourage in my own classroom include helping to support sense of belonging. So opportunities for students to work together in meaningful ways where they actually get to know each other and can support each other in accomplishing a challenge or a task is an effective way to help offset feelings of impostorism, but also to allow students opportunities for support among their peers. And as part of the research that I’ve been conducting in collaboration with my research team, we’ve actually started developing more formalized interventions that incorporate all of those elements, so normalizing, reframing, cognitive reframing, the value of faculty support and modeling, the relevance of role models that students can relate to, and increasing sense of belonging. We’re just currently launching a study that specifically examines the effectiveness of an intervention that includes all of those different elements. At the institutional level, some strategies can include integrating mental health support into the curriculum, increasing access to mental health support for students, normalizing at the departmental or institutional level, which is something we’ve already discussed, having those conversations for, like incoming cohorts of students. There’s research showing that faculty who have greater self efficacy in addressing diversity are more effective at addressing diversity in the classroom, and that can be particularly relevant for addressing impostor phenomenon that’s exacerbated among historically underrepresented students, students from racial, ethnic, gender, sexual orientation backgrounds that are not necessarily represented within their fields of interest. Some of the findings coming out of our teams include the importance of classroom comfort and faculty support, so normalizing and discussing these issues, not just at the level of student, but also among faculty, providing opportunities for faculty to learn and share about their own impostor experiences, so that they are better equipped to bring these kinds of strategies into the classroom or to have these kinds of conversations with students.

Rebecca: We always wrap up by asking, what’s next?

Sara: The focus for our research team, as I mentioned, is really to continue this intervention work, and members of our research team continue to offer workshops as well. We give talks and seminars related to impostor phenomenon that can help to support faculty and staff and students within academia as they address impostor phenomenon in their own lives, but also that offer strategies and tools and techniques that they can bring with them into their departments and into their classrooms. We want to continue to expand the research to include more diverse contexts, disciplines, and even more diverse institutions. So right now, we’re focused on psychology majors, but we are really looking forward to extending this research to other disciplines and other institutions. As I mentioned, it’s an international collaboration, and we’ve had a lot of interest among other faculty and researchers who want to join this effort. And so we really want to expand our research to include international contexts, and then to continue to develop workshops to support faculty training around academic impostor phenomenon. We’ve discussed the possibility of writing a book together that addresses, in particular, context specificity of impostor phenomenon. So one of the novel findings that we are bringing to the literature is the variability in academic impostor phenomenon in relation to even specific courses within a degree program, in relation to different contexts within a discipline. And so I think it’s really important to continue investigating intersectionality and the complexity of impostor phenomenon. Under what circumstances do particular contexts give rise to impostor phenomenon? So it’s not just like for whom, but for whom under what circumstances. And another element of that is, for whom, or under what circumstances, are particular strategies or interventions effective. So there probably won’t be a one-size-fits-all formula for helping to mitigate experiences of impostor phenomenon. The strategies that are effective will depend on for whom and under what circumstances the kind of impostor phenomenon that a student is experiencing. And so we’re really excited about really diving into the complexity of this phenomenon, of this construct.

Rebecca: We look forward to hearing where the research leads and your findings.

John: Thank you for joining us. This is an issue that clearly is affecting a lot of people. So getting more information out to other educators, I think, is going to be helpful.

Sara: I’m really grateful that you invited me to participate in this podcast. As I mentioned, I did some cognitive reframing for myself in preparation for this interview. And for me, one of the helpful thoughts and strategies was to just acknowledge that even if there’s some information that I really would like to cover that I forget, let’s say, or like, even if I’m not quite as comprehensive in addressing all of the relevant points that I would be really excited to share with you, that increasing awareness at any level is meaningful with respect to academic impostor phenomenon, because almost all of us experience it, and unfortunately, many of us experience it in isolation. So the more aware we are of the shared experience of self doubt, even in the face of high levels of achievement, I think the better equipped we’ll be to navigate our own educational and professional journeys in an informed way, in a way that will help us to maximize our true potential and pursue our passion and interest. I just really appreciate an opportunity to share some of this information, to have this dialog and this discussion. It really is my passion, in particular, to support students and to support psych majors in STEM related courses. So, thank you.

Rebecca: Thank you so much.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing assistance provided by Fred Llerena.

[MUSIC]

429. An Educator’s Guide to ADHD

Each student brings individual strengths and challenges to our classroom communities. In this episode, Karen Costa joins us to discuss ways to help students with ADHD thrive.

Karen is a faculty development facilitator specializing in online pedagogy, trauma-aware teaching, and supporting ADHD learners. Karen holds graduate degrees and certificates in education and education leadership; trauma and resilience; trauma-informed organizations; and neuroscience, learning, and online instruction. She is the author of 99 Tips for Creating Simple and Sustainable Educational Videos, and has served as a facilitator for the Online Learning Consortium, the Online Learning Toolkit, and Lumen Learning. Her most recent book, An Educator’s Guide to ADHD, has just been released by Johns Hopkins Press. Through her business, 100 Faculty, Karen offers supportive, fun, and engaging faculty support and development to faculty from all over the world.

Show Notes

  • Costa, K. (2023). 99 tips for creating simple and sustainable educational videos: A guide for online teachers and flipped classes. Taylor & Francis.
  • Online Learning Consortium
  • Lumen Learning
  • Costa, K. (2026). An Educator’s Guide to ADHD. Johns Hopkins University Press.
  • 100 Faculty
  • Clear, J., & Clear, J. (2018). Atomic habits: Tiny changes, remarkable results. Penguin Publishing Group.
  • Costa, Karen (2022). Systems Aren’t Scary. Medium. October 31.
  • Hallowell, E. M., & Ratey, J. J. (2022). ADHD 2.0: New science and essential strategies for thriving with distraction–from childhood through adulthood. Ballantine Books.
  • Dr. Ned Hallowell’s TikTok channel
  • Fehmi, L., & Robbins, J. (2008). The open-focus brain: harnessing the power of attention to heal mind and body. Shambhala Publications.

Transcript

John: Each student brings individual strengths and challenges to our classroom communities. In this episode, we explore ways to help students with ADHD thrive.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

Rebecca: Our guest today is Karen Costa. Karen is a faculty development facilitator specializing in online pedagogy, trauma-aware teaching, and supporting ADHD learners. Karen holds graduate degrees and certificates in education and education leadership; trauma and resilience; trauma-informed organizations; and neuroscience, learning, and online instruction. She is the author of 99 Tips for Creating Simple and Sustainable Educational Videos, and has served as a facilitator for the Online Learning Consortium, the Online Learning Toolkit, and Lumen Learning. Her most recent book, An Educator’s Guide to ADHD, has just been released by Johns Hopkins Press. Through her business, 100 Faculty, Karen offers supportive, fun, and engaging faculty support and development to faculty from all over the world. Welcome back, Karen.

Karen: Thank you. I’ve been here before a couple times. It’s been a while, and I just want to say I’m so impressed with your continued work, that you are able to put these incredibly helpful podcasts out into the world. I think the first time we talked was around COVID lockdowns, about trauma, and you’re still doing this, and I find that so impressive. Thank you for all that you do.

John: In fact, your first podcast with us during the pandemic was our most popular podcast ever, and it remains so, it’s still number one on our hit list of the most popular podcasts.

Karen: Well, that wasn’t me. That was because people were trapped at home and desperate for some kind of simulation. So I can’t take credit for that.

John: You provided some help that they desperately needed during that time.

Karen: I’m glad you said that. I do get nervous about these things, but I think you all are my first sort of podcast stop. I’m talking about this book, and it’s a little different, because the book’s not just about helping students and helping teachers, but it’s about me and being somebody with ADHD and late diagnosed and all that comes with that, and I speak pretty openly about it, but there is an element of vulnerability to that. So I gave myself a little extra TLC this morning, reminding myself that it’s normal to feel that vulnerability. I’m really glad to be having this first initial conversation with the book with you two who are so kind and welcoming and making me feel right at home.

John: And speaking of TLC, do you have tea today?

Karen: I don’t think I’ve ever had tea when I’m with y’all.

John: You’re one of many.

Karen: I don’t pretend, and I like to think I’m a truth teller. So I’m drinking a nice, crisp, cool, Polar lemon seltzer, because when I do podcast interviews or talks, I do tend to get warm, and there’s a non-zero chance these days that that could lead to a hot flash. So there’s no tea, and I’m keeping things cool. So to our listeners who also need to keep things cool, you are seen and supported.

Rebecca: You can have iced tea.

Karen: Iced tea, yeah, I have to limit, while this is another ADHD story for another day, but yeah, I got to be careful about the caffeine. There’s probably a decaf. I’ll explore it.

Rebecca: Maybe next time. Today I have a Kenilworth pekoe tea.

John: Very nice. Was this one you picked up in England too.

Rebecca: This is from Scotland.

Karen: You went to the UK recently.

Rebecca: It was last summer, but I stocked up.

Karen: Oh, I’m sure. I lived in London in college for study abroad, so I never made it to Scotland. That’s on my list. I’m jealous.

John: And I just have a mint tea, which I picked up in the local Wegmans.

Rebecca: Still important. All right, now that we’re all hydrated, we invited you here today to discuss An Educators Guide to ADHD. Can you tell us a little bit about the origin story of this book?

Karen: I always find that an interesting question, because we could go pretty far back, generationally speaking. There’s some stories there, but we don’t have that much time today, so [LAUGHTER]I’ll come into the nearer future. A few years ago, I read a book called Atomic Habits by the author, James Clear. I love reading nonfiction. I’m usually reading, because I am ADHD. The way I read nonfiction, I usually read four or five at the same time and sort of cycle through them, because that’s how my brain works. I really enjoy self- development type books. I know how to take what I need from them and leave the rest, because they often have things I don’t agree with and things that aren’t helpful, but I can usually take a nugget or two, and the message I took from Atomic Habits was to focus on systems more than habits, which is something I had already been doing, but it kind of named that for me in a new way. I got excited about it, and I talked about it a little on social media, and I got some, not a lot of, pushback, but some of the pushback was of the don’t do that, don’t read books like that. You’d be better off taking a nap and resting, sort of like people who don’t really support or like that, quote, unquote, business bros, type of advice. And I found that sort of pushback really concerning, because systems for people with ADHD are really life saving, sort of like assistive devices. And so I wrote an article about it called “Systems Aren’t Scary,” and I think it came out on Halloween, which is we’re recording this the day before Halloween. That’s why I called it “Systems Aren’t Scary” because I’m so clever. And Jim Lang and Derek Krissoff, who were at the time, at West Virginia University WVU press. I was talking to them about writing another book, and they saw that article, and they said, “Oh, can you write this book instead?” And I said, “Okay, sure.” Long story short, a lot went down at WVU a few years ago, and Jim and Derek moved on, and I moved on, and was really happy to end up through the leadership of Greg Britton at Johns Hopkins University Press. The book is coming out. At the time of this recording, it’s October, so I think you’ll be hearing it, right around comes out January, 20, 2026 it’s been a long and winding road, changing publishers like that. For somebody with ADHD who struggled with finishing things, it was interesting. I’m proud of myself that I stuck with it. Writing a book is an incredibly long process, slow process. I like to do things like immediately and quick. So book writing is sort of out of my comfort zones, but I really want to have this in the hands of people. I want the generations coming behind me to have it better than I did, and I really want people to understand ADHD for what it is, and to make the world a better place for my fellow ADHDers, so I’m glad that I stuck with it and got it out into the world.

John: You begin the book with an analogy between ADHD and living in a house that’s open to the elements, in terms of both the advantages and the disadvantages. Could you share this analogy with our listeners? Because I thought it was a great introduction to your book.

Karen: Oh, thank you. I changed that introduction 17 times. It’s lovely to hear that. It’s such a funny thing. Book writing is such a solitary process. So just starting the stage where I get to hear from learners who’ve read the book is very exciting. So give me a minute here to be like, “Oh, that’s so cool, John read my introduction.” I like analogies. The analogy is, imagine that you’re living in a house with the windows thrown open, no screens. You are just sort of at one with the elements. You have a certain layer of protection, but you can hear birdsong. Maybe birds even fly into your house. Maybe the cute, adorable forest animals come into your house as well. You sort of got like a Snow White vibe. Your neighbor walks by the house. You can call out to her while she’s walking her dog, and say, “Come over and have a chat. Have a coffee.” You can pass her coffee through the window. We can imagine sort of this combination of those really lovely positive aspects, but also you’re going to have the not cute forest animals and the mosquitoes in your house. It’s probably going to be noisy. You’re much more exposed to the elements. So it’s this combination of strengths and challenges. We can imagine the neurotypical house as being more similar to a house with the windows closed, so you have certain protection from those elements. There is sort of a more fixed or closed or rigid nature to it. I’m not using those terms as positive or negative, just trying to describe that experience. And there’s positives to that, right? It keeps out the pests. However, you’re not going to get to hear the bird song either. There’s pros and cons. Another analogy, I don’t think this is in the book, but I’ll share with people that I often have been thinking about lately, is if you want to cook spaghetti, you use a pot, and that’s where you boil the water and you cook the pasta in the pot, and then you want to drain the water out of the pot. So you use a colander or a drainer. And one of the ways we can think about ADHD as like the colander or drainer, and we might think of the neurotypical person more like the pot. You wouldn’t say, like, oh, the colander is better than the pot, or the pot’s better than the calendar. They’re different. They have different benefits and different drawbacks. You’re not going to cook the pasta in the colander. You’re not going to drain the pasta in the pot. So there’s lots of metaphors that we can think of ADHD, but this more sort of open fluidity. And a word I’m using a lot lately is porousness, because I think that word has less, sort of like goodness or badness attached to it. It’s kind of more like it’s just the nature of the item. So thinking about the ADHD brain and neurotype as more porous, which comes with challenges, but it also comes with strengths, so that more fluid or porous brain or neurotype or experience has a lot, a lot of benefits, which I talk about in the book, and it has a lot of challenges. And that’s where we can meet folks with ADHD.

Rebecca: A growing share of students are diagnosed with ADHD. Can you talk a little bit more about whether or not this is because more people are being tested?

Karen: When I wrote the book, I didn’t expect ADHD and autism to be in the news, as they have been recently this past year, in quite that way. There’s a lot of conversation happening on this, a lot of interest, and that boggles the mind. We don’t have any evidence, despite what you may have read or seen on the news, we don’t have any evidence that ADHD is growing. It’s kind of presented as like this monster that’s out of control and we have to contain it. That’s not what’s actually happening. We are seeing things like a decrease in stigma. A lot of that is due to social media, and a lot of that is due to specifically conversations that happened during the pandemic where a lot more folks sort of came online and came onto social media and were speaking more openly about some of those challenges. We also know that, particularly later in life diagnosed folks, crises or massive changes will often precede a diagnosis. So a lot of the people who [LAUGHTER] were in a structured work environment and then got sent home with all their stuff one day, [LAUGHTER] and had to live in a very unstructured environment that is often cited as one of the reasons a lot of people realized something’s going on here, because that external structure of the workplace went away. So, that didn’t create the ADHD, It revealed it. We have no data, and there’s no evidence that this is something that is growing because of… I don’t even know. I try not to listen to these people. I don’t want to give them too much attention. But there’s no evidence that it’s growing. It is likely due to an increase in awareness, a reduction in stigma. Social media is motivating people to realize things about themselves, and many folks have been saying, “I want to get tested,” or folks are self diagnosing. So we’re seeing sort of a rise in awareness about ADHD, which I think is a really good thing, because I talk about diagnosis as a map in the book, and whether we can talk more about this formal clinical diagnosis or self diagnosis, diagnosis can be a map, and it typically can be a map to support ,whether that’s through medical treatment, through lifestyle design, or to community. And for me, that was one of the biggest pieces of the puzzle, was finding people like me who I can talk to about this experience and know that I’m not alone in that. So we see that, when done right and supported, diagnosis can lead to a massive reduction in shame, which is one of the biggest challenges for people with ADHD. Diagnosis is increasing more because of awareness and access, and generally speaking, it can be a really good thing because it connects ADHD or their communities.

Rebecca: Folks feel less stigmatized who have ADHD is becoming evident in university environments because people are speaking out more openly about such a diagnosis and also asking for supports and having really healthy conversations. I know that I’ve had some of those conversations with students in ways that I wasn’t having previously, because the students brought that conversation to the table, which I think is really great.

Karen: I think that’s great, and two things can be true. So I think we are seeing a decrease in stigma, and I think like [LAUGHTER] we were starting from a really, really bad place. So like, any improvement is good, but I will tell you, I get messages from people all the time, private messages, like through social media or email, and it’s from people who are working in higher ed who either are ADHD or suspect they’re ADHD, and they’re coming to me privately to ask for advice because they don’t feel they can speak about it publicly. I talk about it because I try to use the privileges that I have to, again, make things better for people who don’t have the privileges and protections. I like to be honest, the biggest reason I’m able to talk about this is because my husband has a stable job that provides me access to quality healthcare. As an adjunct. If I didn’t have that access, would I be speaking about this publicly? I don’t know, because I can’t live without… I don’t really think anybody can, but I have chronic health issues, and I need a lot of support with my various diagnoses, so if I didn’t have that, I wouldn’t be able to do this. Yes, I think two things are true, and we’ll never be bored, because we have so much work to do and so many areas of opportunity. So we won’t be bored, is the good news.

Rebecca: I really appreciate you also just addressing and drawing attention to the differences of experiences often that students might have from faculty and staff too. This is true around accommodations and all kinds of things related to disability.

Karen: I want to speak on the accommodations piece. That was one of the most intense parts of the book. There’s a page in the book where I write about the process to get a diagnosis. Because right now in higher education, our accommodations model, in order to access learning through formal accommodations, students have to come in with a formal clinical diagnosis. And I forget exactly how many steps I wrote out in that process, but it was like 18 steps. That made me feel pretty sick about that, that that’s the model that we’re using, and obviously a lot of folks are designing around that, through Universal Design for Learning and focusing more on accessibility. That’s how I teach. I know so many folks listening to this teach that way. But the idea that the system that we, who claim to be some of the brightest people in the world, have developed has 18 steps in between students and access to learning is preposterous and infuriating. So again, though, the good news is no boredom, because we have plenty of work to do.

John: And your book is a nice, important part of that. And the issue you just mentioned results in a lot of inequity, because those steps take time, as well as some diagnosis that’s not free, typically. The people who are more likely to get diagnosed are people who do have the privilege of good health insurance and more free time and other things. So the impact is quite inequitable on students.

Karen: Absolutely, it’s not just the fact that you are asking somebody who has executive function challenges to go through an 18-step process, which is again preposterous. It’s that even if the person with ADHD can get through that, we know that there are massive inequities around race, class, and gender in terms of access to a formal clinical diagnosis. Girls and women are massively under diagnosed. I was one of those girls who slipped through the cracks until I was diagnosed at the age of 40. We know that black and brown kids are less likely to be diagnosed. They are more likely to be misdiagnosed, often with personality disorders, or they are funneled into sort of like the punitive discipline process, instead of getting access to their actual diagnosis that can lead them to community and to support. You’ve got this incredibly inequitable system that’s just people are getting misdiagnosed or not diagnosed at all. You get into higher education, and you say, in order to access what you need to learn, there’s all these barriers in place, and a formal diagnosis can cost upwards of $3,000 if your insurance doesn’t cover it. In addition, the most recent diagnostic appointment I had was eight hours long. I had to find somebody who could do the work. I had to drive into Boston, which is, as the crow flies from where I live, it’s like 30 minutes, but Boston traffic, it’s like two hours. So eight hours out of work and life, and go in and making the appointment. I can go on and on here. So just the casualness of how people talk about like, “Oh, you just need a diagnosis,” is just so wrong. It’s so, so wrong, and we’ve got to do better.

Rebecca: You talked a little bit already today in our conversation about how diagnosis can provide a little bit of a roadmap. Can you expand upon that a little bit, maybe from your own experience and how that provided you with a roadmap?

Karen: I have had the experience my whole life of feeling like an alien. This is actually a pretty common thing among folks who identify as neurodivergent. There’s some writing on this, which I learned about after I was diagnosed. And I was like, “Oh, that’s cool.” This feeling of wrongness, of this deep shame, of like, why can I do these things but not these other things? One of the things I talk about in the book that’s really challenging for people with ADHD is personal care and dental hygiene. This is the vulnerability I was talking about earlier. One of the things I struggle is remembering to brush my teeth, and not just remembering to brush my teeth, but remembering if I brushed my teeth. So if I leave the house, which I don’t too often, because I work from home, but anytime I leave the house, I don’t know if I brushed my teeth. I can’t remember. Speaking back to James Clear, I have a system that I’ve learned to create, and if my husband’s home because he works from home, I’ll text him and I’ll ask him, can you check my toothbrush to see if it’s wet? And he knows how to help me, so he’ll check. And most of the time, he says “yes,” but sometimes he says “no,” and I drive with a toothbrush and toothpaste in my car and a bottle of water. If I didn’t know that I had ADHD, that’s a really, sort of, like, scary and demoralizing and shameful thing of like, what’s wrong with me? Why can’t I figure this out? Right? Like, I just wrote a book, I have a master’s degree. I speak publicly, and most of the time I think I know what I’m talking about, but I can’t remember to brush my teeth. And that’s one of like, a million examples. When you get the diagnosis and you learn to understand your brain, and I understand now why I don’t remember to brush my teeth. And I understand how to design a system, and I understand that the most important part of that system is if I remembered or if I didn’t. I say to myself, “Karen, I’m so proud of you. I’m so proud that you checked with your husband and now you have your toothbrush in the car. I’m so proud of you,” or if I did remember I say “I’m so proud of you that you were…” like either way to learn how to speak kindly to myself. It was just so confusing before when I didn’t know what was going on. And those skills have been learned through therapy and working with coach and doing tons of study on ADHD and things like that. There’s work involved in that, but yeah, I think that shame reduction piece is so powerful, and you find people like yourself, like one of the books I talk about most in my book is the book ADHD 2.0 by Ned Hallowell and John Ratey, and they’re both medical doctors, but they both also have ADHD. And Dr. Ned, when I was first diagnosed, seeing him say… he would do these little TikToks about what people with ADHD, and then he would say, people like me. And when he said people like me, this doctor who has written multiple books, little pieces of me would start to heal. It was the “people like me,” not even the content that he was talking about. It was when he said, “people like me.” And that is, for me, the beauty of what diagnosis, whether clinical or self, can do, is it can help you find people like you.

John: So you received some really nice support from those videos. What can faculty do to better support students who do have ADHD, and you mentioned in the book that faculty need to unlearn what they think they know about ADHD. Could you talk a little bit about some of the misconceptions that people have?

Karen: The first problem we have in front of us is the name. ADHD stands for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, and I’ve had very lovely sort of people who are ingrained in the clinical or medical model say to me, “that’s not deficit based,” and this has happened to me, so it has the word deficit in the name disorder. Yeah, so that’s not what it is. I still use the term ADHD. I don’t use the term attention deficit hyperactivity disorder because it is obviously deficit based, but it’s just we’re learning now that it’s incorrect. ADHD is not a deficit of attention. It is now increasingly being understood as an abundance of attention. And Hallowell and Ratey are on the leading edge of this. But we’re also seeing this influx of researchers who have ADHD coming into the field, and the framing of research studies and how you approach them, obviously impacts the outcomes. I know I’ve got a lot of research folks that are listening, and when you bring folks in who’ve actually lived with this neurotype, you open up this whole world. We are learning so much more about what ADHD is and isn’t, and one of the biggest misconceptions is that it is either deficit or superpower. So I use this model of strengths-based, challenge-aware, which I think is a much more middle path. It is not fully a deficit; i t does include challenges. I don’t like when people say it’s a superpower, because my family and I are fans of superhero movies, and all the superheroes are intensely miserable, and it has ruined their lives. I talk about Tobey Maguire Spider Man meme in the book, where he’s just the most miserable human on the planet. Superheroes are not generally healthy and happy, well-balanced people. So I like to really bring people into this middle path. This is a neurotype. Another way we can think of it as a brain style. It is part of the natural, vast variety of life and ways of being in the world, and it comes with challenges, and it comes with strengths. And I go into this in the book. We are taught that there’s one right way to be, the neurotypical way of being, and that anybody who diverges from that is both weak and threatening. The reason we do that is so that we can then deny those people resources, its not rocket science. So it’s really quite a radical thing for folks to say, “Wait a minute, I’m not weak or threatening. I’m part of the vast variety and natural neurodiversity that is part of the entire world.” And if you, as an educator, can shift your mind into that, you will not only be better supporting your students, but you’re really also sort of working toward a brighter, better future where we can move beyond some of those limitations. The biggest thing is to also bring in those strengths. And I want educators to know this is like a win-win. Your ADHD students are the creative geniuses of the world, and they are little engagement fireworks that you can be igniting in your classrooms. That’s the number one thing educators tell me that they want to do in their classroom is to engage their students, and your ADHDers are just like human vacuum cleaners who love to consume information, love to learn, have so many ideas, they’re gifts and assets to our world and to our classrooms. The most important thing that you can do as an educator is to get your mindset in check about what ADHD is. Get rid of the deficit. Get rid of the idea that there’s something wrong with us. We are part of the natural variation of the many neurotypes and ways of being in the world. We have challenges. We need help, we need support, but we also come to your classrooms with so many strengths. So if you can come into your classroom with that mindset, you’re going to reduce shame, and you’re going to design inclusive learning experiences for your ADHDers.

Rebecca: Can you talk a little bit about some practices in the classroom that can help lean on some of those strengths and help address some of the challenges.

Karen: The first rule of supporting folks with ADHD is externalize everything possible. Our working memory, as ADHDers, I mentioned this word before, is very porous. An example of that is if I leave this room of my house that I’m in now, and I go into another room with the intention of putting on a different pair of socks. When I get into that other room, I will have no recollection of why I’m in there. If I need to do that, what I will do is I externalize it. As soon as I say “I need to change my socks,” I will walk into the other room and I will repeat to myself, “change shocks, change socks, change socks.” I’m making it external, because I’m not able to hold change socks in my working memory, so that when I get to the other room, I can take that action. This saying “in one ear and out the other.” is how my working memory works, [LAUGHTER] or doesn’t, for that matter. It’s porous. The thing is that, I want to say this quickly, that porosity is the reason behind our creativity. Let’s go back to the open windows. So that’s why we’re getting birdsong. That’s why we are getting to play with the squirrels and have all that fun. That flowing creative energy is Hallowell and Ratey, call it “the paradoxical pairs.” The flip side of that is we can’t hold things in our working memory. So this is what you got to do. Everything is external. Everything gets written down. What you don’t want to do is like, if you’re on site and your students are walking out of class, time is up, you yell out the door, like, “Don’t forget, I want you to read pages 72 to 77 next week,” or whatever, in one ear and out the other. The second it’s out of your mouth. It no longer exists to me. Things need to be put into emails, put into task lists. We need to be putting things in multiple modalities so that it’s something that we can see and touch. I use multiple alarms. So I use like things that I can hear, things that I can see, things that I can touch. And there’s always multiple layers. Task lists are really a lot of bang for your buck. What do you want people to do this week? And it’s got to be something I can see and touch. Couple other things I’ll mention, metacognitive, or what I talk about in the book, is meta learning. So metacognition is learning about learning. Meta learning is sort of just like a more expansive way of not being quite so brain bound. Giving students a chance. I’ll name the elephant in the room, the AI elephant in the room. I’m seeing a lot of folks who are linking metacognition to some of the pedagogical strategies we can use in the AI era, having a greater focus on process rather than product, and metacognition and meta learning is great for this. So asking students, how do you plan to do this? And then after they do it, what did you learn from what you did? It’s great for everybody, but it’s particularly great for ADHDers, because we get to explore our process and what works best for our brains, and then the reflection afterwards, we get to see if it worked, and then we can redesign as we go. That’s a much better process than you imposing what you think your ADHD students should be doing. You’re putting them in the driver’s seat of your learning. This metacognition should really be much more intensely built into all our courses, but it’s a particularly powerful strategy for ADHDers. Fun fact, somebody who got their hands… I didn’t end up having to work with this person …[LAUGHTER] on an early copy of my book, who was from the clinical field, said pretty much word for word, “ADHDers can’t do metacognition,” and there’s reams of data of how good metacognition is for ADHDers. We absolutely can do it, and it benefits us, but there are still so many people out there who have this idea of like ADHDers can’t do that. That very ableist mindset is alive and well. But read the book. There’s tons of research in there to support this. The beauty of this is you’re not trying to make them be a neurotypical student. You’re empowering them to figure out what works for them. I could keep going, but I know we don’t have all day, so I’ll stop there. Read the book for more ideas.

John: Those techniques you’ve talked about are good for everybody, and they’re parts of inclusive teaching practices, which suggests that a lot of inclusive teaching practices will work for a wide variety of students with a wide variety of backgrounds [LAUGHTER] and needs, desires, interest and motivation. This is really good advice for all students. One of the things that you’ve talked a little bit about is that deficit mindset, and one of the things you suggest is that, as you have already mentioned, the term ADHD is a misnomer. And you suggest an alternative ON, or the open neurotype. Do you think using a more neutral term like that might help shift people from the deficit model to a more accurate representation of our students?

Karen: I thought I would have some fun with it and say, If I could rename ADHD, what would I name it? And I landed on open neurotype, because ADHDers, we are often “on,” I don’t know if we have an offsetting that’s one of the best parts about us. We have what the French would call a joie de vivre, a joy in life. One of our challenges is never turning off. It can be quite exhausting. “On” worked for that reason, but it also worked in that idea of a neurotype is one of the words I use to describe these, I don’t like the word conditions, but some folks are still using the word conditions. It’s a better word than conditions. It’s not a disorder, and it’s not a condition, it’s a neurotype. It’s a brain style, and then open is talking to that fluidity, that porosity, that flow, that is the best part of our ADHD learners, and it’s also the root of many of our challenges. I don’t know how we get from attention deficit hyperactivity disorder to something like ON. I do know that if the word deficits in the name, then it’s deficit based. So again, the way I’m doing it is I’m very transparent about my language choices, and I talk in the book and I say, like, I’m going to use ADHD, I’m going to tell you what it stands for, and then I’m not going to use that term again, and that’s what I do in my work. And I hope that, again, as we have this influx of ADHD researchers coming into the field and a lot more advocacy going on, I hope that we start to lean into more inclusive terms, just as one other example in the ADHD 2.0 book, they use the term VAST, variable attention stimulus trait, that is their alternative term for ADHD. And you’ll notice variable attention is speaking to the fact that ADHD is, once again, I’ll say it, not a deficit of attention. And stimulus trait is a much more flexible way of looking at this, not as a disorder, but as a collection of traits.

John: And the use of the VAST term, too, points out that there’s a whole spectrum in which people may have their attention. It could be very narrowly focused, or it could be much more open. And we have a wide variety of people, and we should be trying to address the needs of everyone.

Karen: I talk in the book about there’s this relationship between neurodiversity and biodiversity, which I find very fascinating, because we’re seeing that biodiversity is under attack, and a big part of some of the worst climate outcomes we’re seeing are related to the loss of biodiversity. And some of the original creators of this term neurodiversity were modeling it off of biodiversity. And the idea is that if you look around the world, you see millions of ways that life expresses itself. There’s not one way to be alive, and neurodiversity is lined up with that, there’s not one way of being a human being and expressing yourself and experiencing the world. There’s a seemingly infinite number of ways. So that vast variety is why life persists. Life didn’t put all its eggs in one basket, [LAUGHTER] sort of like why life is here. It’s a good thing. There is strength in diversity. I want to say the word diversity like 100 times a day, because we’re being told we’re not allowed to say it. It’s why we are here. Diversity is strength. So whether it’s neurodiversity, racial diversity, gender diversity, diversity is strength. And I just want to say it a million times, because people don’t seem to get it. And neurodiversity, biodiversity, we need to celebrate it all.

Rebecca: I wanted to circle back to the idea of attention. One of the phrases you used earlier and you use in your book, is that, like abundance of attention, I find really delightful. But we also hear a lot from faculty of concerns about paying attention or distraction or focus, all those kinds of words. Can you talk a little bit more about this range of attention and why maybe this narrow focus on how the term is used is problematic.

Karen: This one could probably be a book in and of itself, one of the first things that people can do if they want to explore this, a fascinating exploration is look at the different words and terms we use across various languages to describe attention. So I’m studying French later in life, which is a very ADHD thing of me, and the French translation is not to pay attention, but to make or do attention, which is a very different way of looking at it. Isn’t it interesting that in America, attention is something that we pay, so there’s a little like, “Hmm, let’s be curious about what’s actually going on here.” There’s a book I talk about in my book called The Open Focus Brain, by this guy, Les Fehmi, and his argument is that this idea that attention, it should be this very like you’re zoning in on one thing, is very much tied to capitalism, and that’s how you are efficient. That’s how you’re a good worker bee. That’s how you produce the most, is by zooming in on one thing. Zooming in on one thing is also what we want to do if we are like under threat. And he argues that by really cultivating a single pointed type of attention, we are training our brains to believe that we are under threat whenever we are sort of in that super- focused type of attention. He presents this alternative called “open focus.” And anybody who’s listening to this, who’s gone through meditation, I’m like a lifelong… this is another podcast… yoga student teacher and meditation student teacher. When you go through the meditation process, you often learn to start with single pointed meditation, focusing on an anchor or your breath, and then you learn to expand out, and you learn to sit in meditation and be open to all of the experiences and all of the noises and all of the sensations. One of those isn’t better than the other, so open focus is the idea that we are able to be taking in everything that’s happening around us: the other students in the classroom, the sound of the air conditioner, the smells in the room, ADHDers tend to have that sort of more open focus that can make it more challenging for us to be in that sort of productive, efficient mode, but it offers many gifts as well. That’s why we’re so creative, and why we are able to connect seemingly disparate ideas in really interesting ways. So it’s, again, that blessing and a curse. The other thing that we will do, ADHDers, when we’re in a setting where you’re saying, I’ve got to zone in and my focus is open, is that we will do something called stimming, which is things like doodling or fidgeting or turning around in our chair, things like repetitive motions, rocking. Both ADHD and autistic folks do this. We’re not doing that because we’re distracted. Doing that helps us to focus. So that’s one of the big messages I guess I’ll leave folks with is whatever you want to call it, you don’t know when people are paying attention. Attention is very complex. It’s very personal. It’s very diverse. Stop trying to police other people’s attention. The way that I pay attention. I mean, my desk is like covered with little toys and gadgets that I use behind the scenes [LAUGHTER] in Zoom meetings to keep myself focused. If you think attention looks like sitting still and not moving, you’re going to say she’s not paying attention. I actually am. I’m deeply paying attention because I’m doing all of those other things that give me those external structures that I need to focus in on what you’re saying. So stop trying to police people’s attention. Know that open awareness and open focus is another way of being in the world, and incredibly valid and important, and we probably need a lot more of it, and trust your students to do what they need to do to be present in your classrooms.

John: A friend of mine is an autism researcher, and we’ve talked about it quite a bit in terms of the type of focus that people with autism have. As I was reading your description of ADHD, I was seeing so many connections in terms of the different types of attention, and you mentioned that there’s an emerging recognition of an overlap between ADHD and autism. Can you talk a little bit about the ways in which they’re connected, or the similarities that occur in autism and ADHD,

Karen: I can. So here’s a fun little story for the listeners. In the middle of writing this book, I got a second diagnosis. After getting late in life ADHD diagnosis, I then got a late in life autism diagnosis, so am doubly blessed. And remember the winding journey of writing the book I mentioned earlier? Didn’t see that one coming either. So yes, I can speak to this from both lived experience and the research. AuDHD is sort of like this new wild frontier that we are seeing rise up. I’m really excited for this understanding of the overlap between autism and ADHD. I think we’re going to be hearing that term, AuDHD more and more and more in the coming years, there’s a lot of unknowns. So I have seen data that up to 80% of autistic folks would also qualify for an ADHD diagnosis. At that level, [LAUGHTER] you start to wonder what’s going on. And there are some folks who are saying, “Are these like the same thing, and they’re manifesting in different folks differently.” There was a time, up until several years ago, where you couldn’t get both an autism and an ADHD diagnosis through the DSM. They said these two things cannot overlap, and now they’re saying 80% of folks with autism have ADHD. So we are learning a lot. There are days when I feel like these are the same thing, and AuDHD is like a thing in and of itself, and there are days when I can feel them as separate entities [LAUGHTER] inside of my head. And it’s hard for me to explain that, unless you’ve lived with these neurotypes, it’s a very sort of fluid situation. I don’t know if it’s a question we’ll even be able to answer through research. I think it’s more something we’re going to move through and have to experience and really listen to people’s lived experiences. But you’re going to see a lot more AuDHDers in your classes, in your meetings. The joke is in our community that if you got a late in life ADHD diagnosis that you can just chill out for a couple years and then you just go and pick up your autism diagnosis as well, because there are some folks who believe the reason that they mask each other, and that’s why folks are getting late diagnosed. One of the ways [LAUGHTER] that I’ve heard it talked about is ADHD is the gas pedal and autism is the brake. So you’re driving a car pressing down the brake and the gas pedal at the same time. It makes for an interesting ride, but there’s some evidence that they’re masking each other, no less challenging for people. They are no less in need of support, but there’s some interesting overlaps going on there. If you’re listening to this and this is something that interests you, we just need a ton more research on this, a ton more support. We need people who are diagnosed and have lived experiences leading the charge on this. But yeah, AuDHD is going to be pretty big and very interesting for us to continue to learn about.

Rebecca: So earlier, you mentioned about Universal Design for Learning and also accessible design. Can you talk a little bit about how those methodologies, frameworks, might really help all students, but ADHDers in particular?

Karen: Yes, absolutely. So. I am a student and a facilitator of UDL, a practitioner of UDL, a wonderful approach that helps us address those accommodations, limitations, fantastic. Two things can be true. My concern about UDL is that sometimes I feel like it’s used to ignore disability or ignore difference, and I’ve heard sometimes UDL practitioners say things like, “We don’t even need to talk about your disability or your ADHD in the classroom, because we have designed this accessible learning experience.” Well, those are parts of me, so UDL is not intended to wipe that away. When done well, it should be inviting that into the experience. So what I think might be helpful, I’ll give an example. For me as an educator, I feel like I’m on the right track when I hear from a student who says I have accommodations, and I look at their letter and I am able to respond to them and say, “I’m so glad you sent me this. All of this is designed into the course already for all students,” that feels like I’m on the right track. And I will often disclose, depending on the situation, and let them know that this is something I live with, and I’m proud and happy to be a role model for them, and I am there to do anything I can to support them. I am not a mind reader, so please keep me updated on anything I can do. So that’s my approach to it, like I want to notice and I want to celebrate their identities and reinforce that throughout the course. I teach, primarily online, asynchronous, so it’s woven into my discussions, into the conversations we’re having, into my grading, into the types of resources I share with students. And it’s not disability I want to eliminate, it’s the need for that letter eventually, right? Like everything is built into my course already, I feel like I’ve done the right thing when I’m able to notice and celebrate and thank that student for sharing that with me and let them know it’s baked into the course for all students. The last thing I want to say about this is one thing I don’t like about UDL is when we say, here, “We can do this for ADHD students,” and people say, “Oh, and Isn’t it lovely that it’s good for everybody.” Two things can be true. Let’s let it be just good for ADHD students, that’s good. That’s good on its own. It’s great on its own. And I recognize that we want to motivate people to see the many benefits of this. And it’s good for everybody is a lovely thing. But I also want us to say that, like, “If it was just good for ADHD students, that would be wonderful, too.” So those two things are happening at the same time for me, and I think that’s important to mention when we talk about UDL.

Rebecca: I appreciate you pointing out these complexities, that multiple things can be true at the same time. Now that comes up a lot in the accessibility work that I do as well. So we always wrap up by asking, what’s next?

Karen: This is coming out in January, so I’m really excited to get the book out into the world, and hearing how people are going to react to it and use it will be exciting for me. The other thing I’m working on now is I’m shifting a bit from climate change mitigation to adaptation in my focus, which is to say, I’m always very mindful when I talk about the climate stuff. We need folks who are working to prevent climate change, and I want people who are doing that to keep doing that. I am feeling called to focus more on adapting to some of the worst impacts that we’re seeing already happening. And I’m really feeling curious about things like the fact that we have hundreds of colleges in coastal areas that we don’t know if they will be able to stay there. So I’m starting to take some classes on things like forced migration related to climate change, because my sense is nobody in higher ed is talking about this, or very few people, which is very understandable. I feel called to do that. I want to support campuses that might need to relocate, students who might need to relocate due to climate change, and I very much want to, in particular, help support disabled folks who are part of those changes, and to recognize that our ADHDers are, I think, the creative folks that we need to be leading a lot of the changes that we will need to be making in the next few decades, in this very volatile era. So one of our greatest strengths is that creativity piece. We don’t just think in terms of what has already been proven. We design and create new worlds and new ideas. I think that’s why I’m able to do that work well, and it’s a little disconcerting for some people, but I feel like it needs to get done, and it’s something I’m feeling curious about. So leaning into that more as well.

John: Certainly an important issue to be focusing on in a country where we need far more of a focus on climate change right now. Well, thank you. I very much enjoyed reading your book. I think it would be a great book for reading groups, for any faculty member to learn more about a non-trivial share of the students they’re working with.

Karen: The number that I use in the book is 5 to 10% but I’ve had classes where up to 40% of my students disclose ADHD, so I think that 5 to 10% is the tip of the iceberg, and I also think the vast majority of our students stop outs and dropouts are probably undiagnosed ADHD. If I’ve got anybody out there who’s connected to enrollment management, I think you’ve got a huge opportunity here to help students persist and complete by considering that lens of undiagnosed ADHD and higher ed’s failure to adapt to that as a big, big opportunity.

Rebecca: Well, thanks so much for joining us. We always enjoy talking to you, Karen, and sharing your work.

Karen: I am so grateful for both of you, again, the fact that you are able to persist and keep doing this is such a testament to who you are, and so needed in our world and our very rapidly changing higher ed so thank you for doing the work that you do. Action is the antidote to despair. So everybody’s got to find their small actions or medium or big actions that they can take to help make a difference. You don’t have to save the world, you just got to do your part.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing Assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]

428. The Science of Learning Meets AI

The widespread adoption of and the rapid evolution of generative AI platforms have created substantial challenges for faculty in how we assess student learning. In this episode, Lew Ludwig and Todd Zakrajsek join us to discuss a new resource they have created that is designed to help faculty use AI to efficiently support teaching practices based on the science of learning.

Lew is a Professor of Mathematics at Denison University, where he served as Director of the Center for Learning and Teaching from 2020 to 2025. Much of his recent work has focused on innovative methods for utilizing generative AI. Todd is an Adjunct Associate Research Professor at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, from which he just retired a few months ago after 17 years. He is also the Director of the International Teaching Learning Cooperative and the Director of four Lilly conferences on evidence-based teaching and learning. Todd is the author of many superb books, and has published six books (so far) in the past five years.

Show Notes

Transcript

John: The widespread adoption of and the rapid evolution of generative AI platforms have created substantial challenges for faculty in how we assess student learning. In this episode, we explore a new resource designed to help faculty use AI to efficiently support teaching practices based on the science of learning.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

Rebecca: Our guests today are Lew Ludwig and Todd Zakrajsek. Lew is a Professor of Mathematics at Denison University, where he served as Director of the Center for Learning and Teaching from 2020 to 2025. Much of his recent work has focused on innovative methods for utilizing generative AI. Todd is an Adjunct Associate Research Professor at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, from which he just retired a few months ago after 17 years. He is also the Director of the International Teaching Learning Cooperative and the Director of four Lilly conferences on evidence-based teaching and learning. Todd is the author of many superb books, and has published six books (so far) in the past five years. Welcome, Lew, and welcome back, Todd.

Lew: Thank you.

Todd: Thank you, Rebecca,

John: Our teas today are:… Lew, are you drinking tea?

Lew: I am. I’m usually a coffee drinker, but I have a lovely Cha Atiso. This is a Vietnamese artichoke tea, which a student brought back for me from the summer, and I’ve really, really been enjoying that. So that’s my tea for today.

Rebecca: What does it taste like?

Lew: It’s got a little sweetness to it, which I like. I don’t put anything in it, but I really enjoy it. And it’s supposed to be healthy, no caffeine, all that sort of stuff.

John: And Todd, are you drinking tea?

Todd: Yeah, I went with a roasted dandelion spice tea. It says detox on the package, and I can always use a good detoxing. So I’m doing that and sipping it from my favorite cup. Mmmh.

Rebecca: That’s right, the tea for teaching mug.

Todd: I have my tea for teaching mug here. I never leave home without it. Actually, I never left it home. [LAUGHTER]

John: And Rebecca?

Rebecca: I have a Swiss Breakfast tea, John.

John: Very nice… on a chilly morning here in upstate New York. And I have a ginger peach green tea today.

Todd: Wow. Quite a variety.

Rebecca: Nice, this big variety. So we’ve invited you here today to discuss your newest book project, The Science of Learning Meets AI: A Practical Faculty Guide to Purposeful Integration, Student Engagement, and Ethical Practice. Can you tell us a little bit about the origin of this book?

Lew: Yeah, sure. I can get us started on that. So as you know, Todd and I both have backgrounds in teaching centers of faculty development. And our national conference is something called POD, Professional Organizational Development Network. And in 2024 we were at that conference, and here ChatGPT had already been out for about two years, and we were still kind of struggling with the idea of, how are faculty supposed to use this? A lot of the questions we were getting is, “Hey, how can I use AI in my classroom?” And it wasn’t until this conference was up in Chicago in 2024 where we realized we were asking the wrong question. It’s not really how to use AI in the classroom, but instead, maybe we should be thinking about, why are we using AI?

Todd: Yeah, and actually, I’ll jump in too, because Lew went right to that technical part and everything. Another thing that happened, which is why I love it when people get together, is Lew asked me if I would help out or just talk to him a little bit about some of the science of learning, because he wanted to really work on this project with bringing AI into this, explaining why it’s important to use it. And I said, “Well, that’s interesting, because I just started to outline a book that I want to do on AI, and I was going to check with you about the AI part, because I got the learning part down.” [LAUGHTER] So we just said, “What the heck, we’ll do it.” And Lew didn’t know me very well at the time, so he said, “Yes.” [LAUGHTER] Anyway, we made it through. But the big thing was that we really wanted a book that would teach faculty and help them understand the learning theory behind why the learning happens and everything else, and use AI to augment that. So this isn’t like using AI to do things, it’s using AI to help us do the things that we’ve been doing.

John: You start the book by acknowledging that faculty didn’t ask for this AI disruption or for any of the evolutions of this. Why start with this instead of with excitement about AI’s potential?

Lew: Oh, it’s called learning from one’s mistakes. So again, ChatGPT came out in November of 2022, by August of 23, I remember on my campus, we had a fairly large across the board faculty meeting about AI. It was about a half-day session. So administration was there, IT was there. And as the Teaching Center Director, I gave probably a 90-minute session on, “Hey, here’s this new technology and how we might be able to use it in our classroom.” And what happened was, just by saying, “Hey, here’s how we might be able to use it,” some folks labeled me as AI pro. So I was just pro-AI, hey, you talked to Ludwig, and he’s just going to be all in on AI. And that was almost like my scarlet letter [LAUGHTER]that I was wearing around campus to some folks. So I learned from that. So any of the workshops, any of the things I do since then, I start off with this exact phrasing, just to kind of level the playing field here, I say “You didn’t ask for this. You didn’t request an unregulated, untested, and rapidly evolving technology to suddenly upend education and nearly every other sector of society.” Now, I’ve been delivering that, like I said, quite a few workshops. I did it back in August for a group of high school teachers in Richmond, Virginia. They applauded me. [LAUGHTER] So it’s just kind of getting it out there and acknowledging it that, yes, this is a disruptive tool. We kind of have to acknowledge that grief and then kind of move on from there.

Todd: Yeah, I would say too, is really, I really thought Lew had a good handle on that part of it. I wouldn’t have put that in there, quite frankly, for the book here, and Lew was pretty insistent that it go in there. But as we started talking it through, I realized I always started any COVID workshops this way. When we were doing emergency remote teaching, if you just started talking about emergency remote teaching and didn’t acknowledge just all of the stuff that happened with COVID at the time, on the number of deaths, for instance, you can’t just jump into something and ignore it. So I think that Lew had a really good point here, and then I started pulling together what I did with that, with what he was talking about. And I think the whole concept is we started thinking within the book of, how do we do this? To recognize people are grieving, that they’re struggling, and we say it’s hard that we see you there, the frustration is real. Teaching is changing, just as it did with COVID. We don’t have a choice of that, and AI isn’t going to go away, so let’s recognize what’s going on, and recognize even some of the impact of AI, and then from there, then move on with a sense of acknowledging what’s going on.

Rebecca: It’s almost like you’re modeling some good teaching practices there. [LAUGHTER]

Todd: Kind of. Periodically it happens.

Lew: We try.

Rebecca: This adapt, create, embed, progression, the ACE model, is used throughout the book. Can you talk a little bit about what this looks like in practice for a faculty member who’s never used AI?

Lew: Yeah, so this work kind of, again, developed that starting point back in November of 24 after we had that initial meeting in Chicago and started to realize we needed some early wins for faculty. So we got a lot of faculty out there who are kind of hesitant about this new technology. And if you gave them something like a prompt or something that didn’t work, they’d be just like, “See, I told you, this AI thing, it’s a disruptive thing. So we’ve been workshopping this quite a bit early January onward, and refining the model. Originally, you ready for this? It was, instead of adapt, create, embed, it was improve, create, integrate, which, as an acronym, is icky. [LAUGHTER] We didn’t think that would land very well, so we went with ACE instead. So for example, the adapt, that’s kind of the easiest win. So what you do is, you take an existing assignment, you have that assignment that it’s a big project, but for some reason, it just doesn’t land with students. They always hand in something a little bit different than what you asked for. Well, that assignment’s begging to be TILTed, right? So Mary-Ann Winkelmes has this idea of transparency in learning and teaching, and it’s a technique that you can do for your assignment to make sure that your students understand why they’re actually doing the assignment. And it’s a kind of a three-step process. And AI is great at TILTing your assignment, and faculty members can take an existing assignment that they have. They’re experts on that assignment. AI can help them TILT that with this framework, and then they can see how that might better fit into their language for their course, and help improve what their students are doing. And the TILT framework has been really good. It kind of raises all student boats. But in particular, it does well for underrepresented and first-gen students do exceptionally well with this. So again, just kind of an early win with the adapt model.

Todd: Should mention quickly that we kind of started out and we based a lot of this on Ruben Puentedura’s model of SAMR, which is the substitution, augmentation, modification, redefinition for all of technology. If you have any new technology out there, you started with substituting it. How can we do this instead? You can augment it. And that’s a really interesting model. Didn’t quite work with what we were after. And so Lew had lots of workshops he had been doing. And so we kind of used that as a foundation. But as Lew just pointed out, the adapt, which would be similar to that original substitution, is to get you rolling. And I’m going to go ahead, Lew and take I’ll take the other two real quickly. So next is create. And essentially, it’s looking at how you can do something that you really couldn’t do before. And there’s lots of things that are out there that we could use for this one. We’ll talk a little bit more about those, probably later on, as we’re looking at some specific examples. But when you think about what you can do and couldn’t do before, one quick thing is a daughter, one time, was struggling with something, and she said, “Can you help me?: And I said, “I’m busy right now. I can help you a little bit.” 15 minutes later, I said, “I can help you now.” She said, “Oh, took care of it.” I said, “How’d you do that?” She says, “Oh, I just got on a group, a small online group, and then we solved it together.” And I said, “Who was it?” And this was years ago. And she said, “Oh, there was a student from Germany, one from South America, somebody from Nebraska, and myself.” That was never possible before. And so many things in AI do things like that. They’ll set up things we could never do before. So the “create” is, how can we do things different? And then once you’ve adapted it and created it, the next thing is, just embed it. Just make it part of the regular aspects of your course. How do you do that? And what we like to point out over and over again is that, you do this wherever you’re at. If you’re just getting started, you just adapt some things you’re doing. And that’s where Lew is really good at setting some of those things up. If you’re a little bit nervous, just take something you’ve always done, do it with AI, do a little bit better, faster, and then just get started, but don’t get overwhelmed with it.

Todd: And the other thing about doing with something you’ve already done is then you’re the expert, and you can critique what AI is doing for you. I wouldn’t go off and learn a brand new subject you learn using the AI, because I’d have no idea. But again, coming from that wheelhouse of your own expertise, don’t forget you are the expert with the content as well as your students and context. So keep that in mind whenever you’re dealing with AI.

John: And that example you use of the TILT model is a good one. I’ve given workshops to faculty about it, and a lot of people were reluctant to put in the effort to make all those changes. But when you show them how AI can do that, or better yet, if you share perhaps a prompt, or if you share a GPT or a chatbot tool that they can plug in their assignments to and their learning objectives, and it can do it for them, or at least give them a starting point on it, it makes it so much more likely that people are going to do that. So you talked a little bit about the ACE model, which is used throughout the book. But could you tell us a little bit about the organization of the book?

Lew: Yeah, sure. So the book’s kind of broken up into three parts. The first part, we call it “Creating your own Gen AI roadmap.” And again, chapter one, you didn’t ask for this, but here it is. So just kind of, again, acknowledging that situation that we find ourselves in and how to move forward with it. Then in chapter two, we start talking about what it means to think about shifting our teaching in the world of generative AI, so the idea of being transparent with our students and how we’re using it and setting up good communication with them, and then also the idea of as faculty members, as we’re embracing this, we really have to be curious and flexible as we work with this technology. We’re always pushing our students to take risks, be flexible, be curious. Well, guess what, that shoe is going to now fit on our foot as we try to move forward with this model.

Todd: So that kind of got things up and running, and then we kind of ran right into the learning aspect of it. Just to give you an idea of the book, I guess is probably the easiest way to do this is. Chapter four is on universal design. I’ve been a long time advocate of universal design, and I think AI can be now done to do things that were really challenging before. So we did dedicate an entire chapter to universal design. Then chapter five, we really thought community was important. So chapter five is about building classroom community and trust, looking at belonging, engagement, and integrity, kinds of issues. Chapter six comes into backward design, a huge aspect of teaching and learning, kind of knowing where you’re going as your goal. And then chapter seven is looking more at learning science of cognitive load, attention, spacing, interleaving, retrieval practice. And that’s the “building the foundation section.” And the last section of the book, section three, is for kind of deeper learning. We looked at some things about teaching and learning that just we know works well. So chapter eight is guiding students from novice to expert. We put together in that section zones of proximal development, scaffolding, and the gradual release of responsibility as ways of helping students kind of go into deeper aspects of learning. Chapter nine is on strategic learning. So we looked at transparency, TILT, cognitive apprenticeships, metacognition and those types of issues. And then we wrapped it up with chapter 10 of persistence and motivation. So there we pulled together the concept of self efficacy, growth mindset and self-determination theory. So the chapters have two or three strong learning principles to them, but they’re put together in ways that not only help explain the individual things, but also overall this concept, like persistence and what kinds of things go into that. And then the last thing I’ll say, since I’m on a roll right now, is overall, I think we really thought it to be helpful, repetition is just helpful for learning, right? We know that. And so we did is we built a book that has strong repetition. So chapter after chapter, we basically started with chapter four, and then we go all the way through chapter 10, and it’s set up so that there’s always an opening story or anecdote to set it up, which we’d want to do for just getting the learning focus there. Then from the model, there’s an improve activity, and then we look at the science components, and from there we might be looking at metacognition or Bloom’s taxonomy or something. So that comes into the second two parts of the model. Here we have a create and then embed, those activities are in there. And then we talk about the ACE model, and we have more activities that come into there. Then we look at risks and guardrails. And again, we’re going to acknowledge everything has risks to it. We’re not going to just pretend like it’s all great. And then we have a conclusion, pull it together, and we finished every chapter with discussion questions and reflection questions. So if you’re a faculty developer and you want to use this as a book group, for instance, we’ve got your discussion questions already built in, but for having faculty work through it, there’s reflection questions in there. The last thing I’ll mention is that we talked really extensively about how to cite this stuff, big APA kind of person, but we really wanted this readable, and so we went with a model where we put everything in as end notes, so as you read through it, you don’t get the standard citations with dates all the way through it, it just reads like a novel, almost, and I think it’s really easy to read. So you don’t have to read it cover to cover, although you should, [LAUGHTER] maybe three times. You can just go through and pick out what you like, but if you do go through, we’ve actually built it so that you start with simple kinds of examples and move to more complex ones. And Lew is masterful at putting together how to like, ask questions and do prompts and specifically with a separate font in there, we just have paste this in and add your components, and it spits out the answer. Pretty cool.

Lew: So what Todd’s explaining there is, we have a lot of different techniques. We have things called activities as well as examples. So each chapter has six activities, which are kind of page-long discussions of how you might use AI. And it’ll start off with some prompting, like he said, in that different font, but you put it in your context. We don’t do this: “Oh, a biologist would do this. Now you do it for yourself.” You actually, in the context of this thing, put in your information so you’re directly dealing with it. So we have, like I said, six of those for seven chapters. So 42 of those things. Each one could be a workshop. And then also we have smaller examples for seven chapters, we have 12 smaller examples, which is another 84 prompts. Those aren’t prompts, those are just more ideas. But Todd mentioned this idea of meta prompting. We give you a way to turn those examples into a prompt for yourself. So you’re using AI to create your prompt for you, and I think it’s called meta prompting, so that’s what he was referring to there.

Rebecca: There’s a lot written about the science of learning and Todd, obviously, you’ve written some books on the subject. How did you decide what science of learning concepts to include?

Todd: I just put a whole bunch of stuff in there. And then Lew started saying, “Nope, nope, nope.” [LAUGHTER] No, we got along great on these things. It basically boiled to Lew does tons of workshops, I do workshops, I think I’ve been at 300 campuses so far. So I looked through the different presentations I’ve given, and when things kind of hit and when they didn’t hit. Cognitive load is something a lot of people just don’t quite understand, and is a huge foundation of learning, because within cognitive load, you’ve got automaticity and schema activation and all kinds of different things that are practicing retrieval kinds of things. So I just went back to the warehouse of stuff and picked the things that worked, which is what I still think is really, really valuable about the book, is that these are things that work, and it’ll help explain them as you go. Big things like the metacognition, Bloom’s Taxonomy, cognitive load, automaticity, practice, retrieval, interleaving, the kinds of things we’ve heard. And it was hard, I will say, Rebecca, it was really hard. There’s a lot out there. I mean, obviously I got what is it a 270 page book on learning. So how do you just fold in some of that? And so, it doesn’t have everything, but I think it has the big things.

John: So you mentioned before that AI allows us to do things that we couldn’t easily do before. Could you give us an example and walk us through that in terms of how AI could be used to create learning activities that could not be done as easily in the past.

Lew: Sure, individualization of instruction. I’m at a pretty small school here at Denison, but I could imagine, wow, what if I was teaching a class of 400. So I might end my class here at my small school with, you know, a muddiest point, I get 20 responses. I look those over, what did students struggle with that day? And then next class, I can kind of address that. Imagine if you had 400 students, what could you do with that? Well, now, with AI, you can take this classroom assessment technique of muddiest moment and, on the spot, have students type their prompt into, say, a Google form or something like that, and as maybe the students are off working on some kind of project or discussion together, within two or three minutes, you could use AI to organize those muddiest points and give me the top three things that these 400 students are struggling with, something that was just was not even feasible before. So I think you know, at scale, this thing can be really useful for those types of examples. And with regards to CATs, the classroom assessment techniques, Todd’s got a book of like, 50 of these things, right? So there’s so many things that you can kind of do on the fly that AI can then help you with, kind of the managerial stuff, just the paperwork thing of keeping track of that stuff so you can respond in the moment for what your students are doing.

Todd: And Lew, I appreciate you mentioning that book, it’s interesting, got me thinking real quickly here. So that book is Classroom Assessment Techniques, which not too many years ago was like the standard. Everybody had a copy of this thing, and they did because the first edition was 1988 I believe it was, second edition was 93 though, and in 93 was right about the time we started talking about learning versus teaching, and how would you know if students are learning? And along comes Angelo and C ross, their book was out, I guess, already, and so it explained it. I mentioned this quickly because I then worked with Tom Angelo to do the updated version, the third edition, which is now out 30 years after the second edition. And the second edition was still selling, but we were removing things like “hand out papers to the students, have them respond on the muddiest point, and then take them home, but make sure you don’t ask questions that you don’t have time to respond to. Don’t ask elaborate things because it will take too much time.” Lots of stuff about CATs was about being careful not to overwhelm yourself. And if you think about that in the old days, that’s what you do. Pieces of paper were handed to, you’d read through them and everything. So we took out things like “share your results on the overhead protector,” and those are gone, and then we replace them with things like Lew was saying is, just put your students into a small think-pair-share, have them respond to this thing with a PollEverywhere or something, and then while they’re talking, then come up with the four muddiest things going on, and then teach those in the second half of class. And so, all of those classroom assessment techniques that we’ve been using for 30 years can now be made easier with AI. So I’m really excited about this.

Rebecca: You mentioned earlier about the chapter on Universal Design for Learning, and I know you’ve been a long time advocate, Todd. Can you talk a little bit about how faculty can use AI to design courses that are better for diverse learners and really have kind of access in mind, rather than retrofitting accommodations.

Todd: Yeah. So number one, I think the thing to point out here is, so I teach, this Lilly teaching conferences. They’ve been around for a long time. There’s different types of sessions that I’ll include in the program, and some of the sessions, and I talk to the presenters about this all the time, some of the sessions are just hot topics that you know are just going to go: engaging students in asynchronous classes, it’s going to fill a room. How to do active learning strategies, going to fill a room. They always have. Sometimes you have topics, though, that you put on the program because you have to talk about them. And if you don’t put them on the program, even though they’re not popular, then it doesn’t get picked up. And I remember putting sessions in the late 1990s, early 2000 about diversity that would have four people in a room, and individuals would say “there’s only four people in there.” And I’d say, “We’re still putting it on the program.” UDL was another one, anything on universal design, I can tell you I’d put in the smallest room in the conference, because it would be a great session, but it would draw like seven people. And one of the reasons it didn’t draw many people, and quite frankly, across all of higher education, people might love the concept, it’s really hard to do. If we’re going to do things like multiple means of expression, which is a key factor of universal design, it can’t just say that you can share your results in one way. What if you’re not good at putting text together, but you really have the idea down. So maybe you create a video, or maybe you have a play, or maybe you get in small group and have a discussion. Multiple means of demonstrating the information, so presentation, how do I explain this in a way that people can get it that’s always been hard, it is now being made really easy because we can go to AI with the correct prompts, and we can come up with multiple ways of expression, multiple ways of presentation. Lew was talking about having a class of 400 with the students in there. You could say to the students: “Here’s what I want to do. We’re teaching metacognition. Everybody think of something you love to do now, type into AI. I love to blank. And I want to learn more about metacognition so that I could explain it to my friend.” So I could type in I love long distance bicycling, and I want to learn metacognition. Rebecca might put in that she loves rock climbing. John might put in like he likes baking, and Lew might probably put in there he likes street fighting. [LAUGHTER] So you put those prompts in there, and then what pops out is everybody in the class gets to learn it in their own… I mean, what could be more universal than that? And so I’m just really excited about it. And we did the whole chapter, and Lew and I talked about it, and I think at the beginning I wasn’t even going to do a whole chapter, and he said, “Yeah, we need to do a whole chapter.” And so I think AI will open the gate so that people can finally do universal design in a way that’s meaningful without overwhelming them.

John: Faculty have been overwhelmed, first with COVID and now with AI, and many other things that are happening externally. How does your book address the reality that faculty don’t have enough time or energy to learn a whole new technology on top of everything else they’ve had to learn in the last several years.

Lew: Fair point. I think the thing we need to start with is the idea that we want to be careful and not this chase the technology, because if you do that’s going to make things worse, you’re going to get frustrated. What you want to do is try to use the tool to make things better. So I often talk about there’s 2, t-w-0, too many shiny objects out there. And one of the ideas with the too many shiny objects is there’s all these little prompts that people: try this, try that, try that, and that’s really frustrating for faculty, because it’s just a little bit beyond their skill set of what they want to do. It’s a biology example, and they have to bring it down into what they want to do. The other thing is, with the shiny object, is the idea of treating AI like this big shiny hammer, and then you’re running around trying to find all these curricular nails to try to beat down of how I’m going to use AI to do that, that is just such the wrong way to address AI, letting the technology lead first, you’re just going to make things worse and you’re going to stress yourself out even more. So what we want to do is we want to go back to basics. We want to think about backward design: at the end of this course, what should my students know? What should they understand? Then how am I going to assess whether they understand that? And then finally, how would I go about teaching that? And that’s where we decide whether AI might fit in or not. So again, it’s not the idea of trying to get AI in the classroom. I think as faculty members, we want to be really careful about how do we use it to be a creative assistant for us and kind of level up and improve our existing teaching practices. And the thing is, the book, all these teaching practices that we’re doing, these are well reasoned research techniques that have been laid out in chapters four through 10, backward design, ZPD, TILT, all the fun letters, UDL, all that stuff. But again, it’s trying to use that in a practical way, trying to develop your teaching skills more, and then just using AI as the tool to help you with that guidance along the way.

Todd: I wrote an article years ago. I was like, we just want to be well, that’s all we want. [LAUGHTER] So this concept of what we’re doing, if we think about what we do as faculty members out, as Lew pointed out, we’re chasing things a lot of times, and that’s just a problem. And this goes back to… remember when clickers came out, student response systems. Everybody’s like, “Oh, I want to use a student response system because my colleague’s using it,” and as faculty development directors, we are constantly trying to talk people out of using technology unless they actually needed it. Backward design. Why do you want to use it? Student response systems are always fun, because it’s like, I want to use student response systems and my friends and I would say, “Okay, so why?” “So we can gather student responses” and I’d say, “Okay, you know, you could just have them raise hands. Like, how many of you think this?” They say, “Well, yeah, but I want to know like anonymous.” I say, “Okay, have them close their eyes and raise their hands well.” “But I want to tally them.” “Alright, well have them close their eyes, raise their hands and then count them.” I mean, these things are not necessary. But then when they start to say, “Okay, but I want to know some qualitative aspects, what are they thinking and why?” Now we can use the technology. So I think that’s helpful. And so when you go back and look at what really takes time in teaching, those types of issues do, I can’t, like have everybody talk about muddiest point, because I don’t have time to read through those. Now you do, because AI can skim through those quickly for you. If you’re prep timed, you put in exhausted in there. I was exhausted because when I taught history and systems of psychology the first time, I would be up from 10 o’clock at night till two in the morning putting together a lecture. And I knew the stuff generally, but I had to go look for it. But I spent all my time looking. I was looking for the information. Then I’d find it, and then I would embed it. With AI I’m going to get the same kind of information, I’m just going to get it really faster, and because I can pull that together with the knowledge base I have, then I can put it out there. So prep time is going to drop, grading time is going to drop in terms of figuring out how to read through these types of things. Underpaid, by the way, I think you might have mentioned that one, just so we can’t do a lot about that. So sorry, yeah, for the underpaid part. But I want to finish with one quick thing here. There’s a book that I did actually get accepted for publication that I have never written. The contract was signed in 1994 and the reason I mentioned this is that what I wanted to do was take a stats book, but I thought we’re teaching statistics without kind of framework. So what if we took the old psych studies that were really the cool studies, took the data set, retrofit a data set basically that would give you the same data. Have students analyze the data, come up with what they’ve got, and then talk about what the data means, and then explain to them how that fits into like, that was the Bobo doll experiment, where Bandura had models hit a bobo doll, a blow up doll, and then they give the same doll to kids and see if the kids would do the same thing. You could replicate these studies while learning statistics. And I was told I couldn’t write that because most faculty members teaching statistics don’t know those studies. And so at the time, there was no way to do it. Now, with AI, you actually could, it would be very easy to say, I want to know more about Bandura’s Bobo doll study. And so I think that’s some changes that we’re going to have that are really going to be helpful.

Rebecca: One of the things that you’ve both underscored is leaning on the faculty member’s expertise because they can validate what’s coming through the AI tools. [LAUGHTER] So you’re not worried about the reliability, because you have that expertise, and the things that you’re suggesting people use are relying on that expertise to some extent.

Todd: Yeah, and that’s the thing. They’ve got the expertise. How can we help them with it? And help them by putting together a book that’s very modular. You can just go through and work through these things. Actually, the activities are set up, and Lew did this, I thought it was fantastic, they’re put in boxes. You could pull the whole thing out and make a workshop out of it. Very, very easy to pull this stuff out and do that, but by making these things very consistent, we know that reduces cognitive load, which is going to reduce some of that exhaustion and extra work.

Lew: And the other thing is, the examples were set up in a way, again, that they relate directly to what you’re doing in your classroom, your assignment, your example, not something that, again, the cognitive load that you have to translate from somebody else’s existing example. And again, that’s one of the neat things that AI allows you to do. Because now, instead of me saying in a book, do this example, I can put a little bracket there and say, insert your example from your discipline here, and all of a sudden you have individualized learning, individualized application for the teaching technique that you’re trying to do using the power of AI to do that.

John: And one of the things I’ve seen is that we have a lot of people attend workshops on AI just to learn how they can block it and how they can ignore it. But when the focus is on activities that actually allow them to do their work more productively or more easily or more efficiently, they get a bit more excited about it and then start thinking about how they could be using it to improve their courses and to improve their lives in general. And I think that’s a nice way of introducing people to AI who are initially somewhat resistant to it.

Lew: Yeah, it’s critical. I don’t think you can walk into a classroom and say, okay, students, we’re going to use AI today without understanding it yourself. And you hit the nail on the head there, the best way to do that is to do something that you are the expert in, and then learn to explore this technology on your own. It’s going to take a couple years for us to kind of get used to what’s going on. I think in a few years, we’ll be ready to think about how we might use this with students and things like that. But as a faculty writ large, we’re going to have to have a better understanding ourselves of just how to use those tools. And I think to your point about students misusing it and things, we can now have better conversations with them if we better understand how to use the tools ourselves for our own work.

Todd: And how people learn. [LAUGHTER] So we have tht published in the book too. That’s what it does. It helps you understand how these processes work, and so you learn about things like cognitive load. So then you can not teach cognitive load, but using that, build assignments that have lower cognitive load. That was one of the things that Lew came up… I love that one assignment that you came up with, Lew, is basically it’s you load the assignment in and says, “Where are students going to have high cognitive load in terms of really struggling with this assignment? And then AI says, “Oh, they’re going to stumble here, here and here.” And then you start rewriting it. It’s not a lot of extra work for you, and it helps the students. You don’t have to go through examples and have all those students lined up outside your door in office hours, saying, “I don’t understand why this thing works.” And so yeah, I think it’d fantastic.

Rebecca: I appreciate the idea of meeting people where they’re at, for sure. You mentioned something about a couple of years, maybe we’ll be ready to really integrate it with student learning. In five years, maybe, what does good teaching with AI look like?

Todd: This is kind of a fun one. I actually was asked to do a workshop recently that they were looking for a speaker, and they said they were interviewing different people, and they said, “We just want somebody come in and talk to us about what teaching will look like in 5 to 10 years.” I said, “If somebody tells you that they know what teaching would look like in 5 to 10 years, I would not ask them to give that presentation.” Because I don’t know, we used to talk five years out. Tom Angelo’s book with CATs was good for 20 years and still kind of worked. That stuff’s not going to handle anymore, because just in the last three to four years. Can you imagine, just before AI took off, go back just a few years and predict that it would look like this? So I don’t think we have a clue about what overall it’s going to look like. I do think we can look at some trends, though, and we can look at some directions we’re taking, because we can’t just throw our hands up and say “we don’t know,” but we want to be careful about what it’s going to be and it’s just going to be difficult, but there’s lots of good stuff coming out. And I’m going to actually ask Lew to do this, because earlier today he was explaining to me an article he’s reading. I think this stuff is fascinating that’s coming out.

Lew: Sure, I’ll jump in. So one of the things, not only do I keep an eye on higher ed and what’s going on with AI, but also the K through 12 space, and I follow a lot of folks on substack, it’s interesting. I think a lot of the discourse right now is going on in substack, as far as with AI and teaching and learning things. But anyway, there’s a fellow I’m going to try to pronounce his name, Nick Potkalitsky from Ohio, and he’s working with our Ohio Public Schools and writing about that. So the state of Ohio has mandated that by July 1, 2026 all school systems are supposed to have some kind of AI policy in place. So Nick is working with some of the larger school systems, Cincinnati, Columbus, Cleveland and things like that. And in this article he talked about on substack, he’s like, “Listen folks, this is going to be a three to five year rebuild. This is not going to be a quick policy fix. Rebuild means rethinking instruction, assessment, and curriculum, basically from the ground up. And how might we support teachers to make that happen and things like that. But teachers clearly need to be in that conversation. They need to be in that room.” This is the K through 12 space, and I think that’s only going to translate to higher ed as well. So the sooner faculty can get out there and start engaging in this technology and seeing what it works for them, then they will be able to kind of think down the road of how that’s going to affect their students in their classroom.

Todd: We have an epilogue in the book we did too after chapter 10, there’s a section in terms of what we think is coming along. And I just want to add one more quick thing here, when I think about what good teaching is, throughout my career… so I started teaching in 1984 so I’ve been teaching for a minute… and the concept here is that throughout all of that time, when I think about things I wanted to do, and what frustrated me were things that I couldn’t do because I didn’t have time or I didn’t have a way to do them. Universal design was just one example of that, but lots of things. With 400 students, I would love to ask them an essay question, but there was no way to look at that, even to get a sense of what they were writing. I would like to put students in small groups and looked at multiple versions of what they were talking about. There’s so many things out there. And now, as I start looking at what the future of teaching might look like, it’s kind of like one after another we just remove those barriers. So I don’t know what it will look like, but I know it will look better because it is removing things that we can’t do. And I will just end with my chunk of saying this is that we so quickly, when this came out, went right to cheating. Just immediately, the first articles out were, how are we going to stop students from cheating? How are we going to stop them? Students were cheating before AI came along. Don McCabe did a lot of work on this, and the proportion of students cheating in some way was off the chart. It made it easier, no doubt about that, and it does create a real problem, because if students can just jump in and do AI, then there’re many that will do that. But I don’t think we have to go there. And Lew and I talked a lot about this too, is that we shouldn’t just go there. We should start looking at opportunities. And I just talked to someone the other day who said, like, “How are we going to know when we can fully trust AI when it gives us an answer?” And that’s the kind of stuff that just drives me nuts, because when we talked about hallucinations, and so many faculty immediately say, “Oh, I put that in and it made a mistake.” So do I, sometimes. There are times when I make mistakes. I’ve heard my colleagues say stuff and I say, “That’s not true.” And so it’s no different than humans in that respect. We’re going to be able to trust it when we can look at it and we know it’s right, but it is getting better all the time. And Lew said it earlier in this discussion we’ve had here today too, is we can’t focus on what it was. We have to focus on what it can be. And I think looking forward for teaching, there’s some really cool stuff coming.

Rebecca: I think one of the things that you’re highlighting, both in your book and how you responded, is it remains anchored in the science of learning and just how we’re using the technology, and things might shift, but if we keep focusing on good teaching and learning practices [LAUGHTER] and just get them better, it’s not a surprise.

Lew: Well, it’s interesting, especially at the higher ed. We’re all trained in a very specific discipline, a very specific area. We’re experts in that field. We were never trained to teach, or very few of us maybe had that one course as we were TAs or something like that. And again, what the AI is allowing us to do is to further our expertise and our teaching and to kind of push the boundaries where we just didn’t have that training before. So I think, as Todd pointed out, I think there’s going to be a lot of opportunities just to make things better, hopefully.

Todd: Before we wrap up this question too, I’m just going to kind of put a charge out there, because Lew mentioned a little bit earlier, but in the model we have for adapt and stuff, for those of you who are listening, if you haven’t done it yet, just try dumping one of your assignments in for a topic or an area that you know students struggle with a little bit put into the AI. And the book’s got some examples on how to do this, but you could just say, “Where will the students struggle with this?” When I teach statistics, distribution of sample means, always give them fits. It took me years to figure out how to get around that, but if I was a brand new teacher and never taught before, I could put distributional sample means in there and say, Where will my students struggle? And it will tell you, here’s some places. And then, if you want to set that off to the side and then teach it and see where they struggled and make a comparison. And if it kind of lines up a little bit, you know it’s a gateway to kind of figuring out where the problems are going to be before they emerge. Wouldn’t that be cool?

John: So this is the first time you’ve worked together on a project like this. Could you talk a little bit about the working relationship and how that evolved?

Todd: Yeah, let me jump in there real quickly. Number one is writing a book is hard. I mean, it is really, really hard. And AI actually has helped us out with this too. So I wrote a book, this New Science of Learning first edition took two and a half years to write that thing. This book was nowhere near that, six, seven months, and we put a lot of time and energy into it. But the point is, it’s hard. Working with somebody is even harder because now you got to talk about what you’re doing and look at different points of view and everything else. And I think what was really cool with the way Lew and I kind of set it up is that we were coming from different directions. I had the learning theory. He was coming in from the AI, I would write a bunch of stuff, and he’d say, that’s really cool about all that metacognition. Maybe we can change it from like 3000 words down to, I think, 42, one time. And I said, I’m not explaining metacognition in 42 words. And then he gave me like 150 so we had to compromise and go through that. I would just say, working with him, he gets stuff done fast. He is really, really good at things in terms of understanding AI component. His prompting was amazing. I don’t know he’s a little mathematician-ey for me sometimes, but, you know, it was alright working with him. So all in all it was a positive experience. And I think Lew would say the same thing. So what’s the next question? [LAUGHTER]

Lew: No, it was a lot of fun. I really appreciated, as you’ve already mentioned, Todd is a very prolific author, so he was able to help us navigate all of those rough and challenging waters. So I was so much appreciative. But I think we complemented each other well, as far as what we brought to the table, and it’s exactly you know, what the book needed. And in particular, I remember Todd that GLCA, the Great Lakes College Association talk that you gave, what was the title of that? You remember something about neurodiverse learners?

Todd: It was basically how AI can help neurodiverse learners to be better learners. The title is way better than that.

Lew: Right, and Todd, he graciously used himself as an example, I will say. So a lot of things made sense to me [LAUGHTER] after that presentation Todd, [LAUGHTER] I’ll just leave it at that.

Todd: So, let me just say this. Yeah, I explained a little bit about ADHD and some of the characteristics of people who have ADHD, like time blindness, where you think something’s gonna take 40 minutes, but you don’t have a clue? Might be 10 minutes. Might be 17 hours. Who knows. You set up your task list, but you’ve never, ever finished a to-do list. I have never finished to-do list. And yeah, I went through all of those types of things and a couple of other things that I kind of struggle with. And then Lew when we finished, he says, it’s been great working with you, but I’m not sure if I’d heard that presentation first I would have signed the contract. [LAUGHTER] Well, you did it.

Lew: No, it was fine. It was fine.

Rebecca: So Todd, some of our long-term listeners might be curious what role opera played in this book. Didn’t you listen to a lot of opera last time?

Todd: Yeah, you know what? Let’s just throw this in there real quickly, because this is part of the ADH stuff that I’m learning, to whatever extent this fits in with this whole interview here. So ADHD is one of those things that, much like dealing with gluten intolerance and several other things, people think, if you’ve really got it, you must have known it your whole life. There are people who find out later in life that they have this thing. I always knew that kind of general things with ADHD which always struggled with a little bit. And I knew I had some of it. But, I mean, I was 60 years old when I was diagnosed, and so that concept there is suddenly I started to realize and read bunch of books about things like time blindness and some other things, but I had a terrible time writing. And a person, Tamara Rosier, who wrote a fantastic book, Your Brain’s Not Broken. It’s been reviewed in the New York Times and stuff, she said, “listen to opera, like, crank it up. Don’t do ear damage, but crank it up and do that while you’re writing.” And I said, “that will never work, because I have to have it quiet.” And she said, “Just try it.” And I put opera on and cranked it up, and I churned out work like I’d never turned it out in my life. And she pointed out to me that my brain’s always looking for stuff. Part of it would settle on that, and then it just kind of left this focus for the rest. Still had to have absolute quiet when I read. But for writing, that worked. I got put on some ADHD medicine, and two days after I started the medicine, I cannot listen to anything while I write. [LAUGHTER] To me, that’s fascinating, because what it now means is my brain’s actually kind of slowed down enough that that becomes a distraction. But that to me as a cognitive person, that differentiation is fascinating.

Rebecca: That is fascinating,

John: And that’s a nice preview of our next podcast that will be coming out next week. We’re talking to Karen Costa about ADHD and her experiences with that.

Todd: She’s really good.

Rebecca: So we always wrap up by asking, what’s next?

Lew: So I’m a mathematician by training, and I was just at a recent large gathering of many of our professional organizations, and for years now, they’ve been calling for, especially in like the high school setting, that we need to teach more statistics, data analytics, modeling, in other words, creating mathematical pathways, kind of beyond the calculus curriculum. The rub is, is that the way folks are trained, they’re basically trained for the calculus curriculum and not these other things. So what I’m doing is, I’m actually working with some organizations like Math for America to consider how we might take frameworks to increase the number of teachers that were able to develop these courses in these different areas. So what we’re doing is we’re looking at something I like to call AI-assisted retooling, so teachers are learning new content alongside an AI partner to expand their mathematical pathways. So, that’s kind of a really exciting thing that I’m starting to work with. We got a few case examples that we’ve been doing. I’ve been a case study myself of doing that. So, I’m really excited about that. And of course, you know, I’m continuing to work with teaching centers on workshops and things around the book.

Todd: Nice. For me, so I got another book started, because why not? These are always fun. This particular one’s going to be different, though. So I’ve probably said about as much as I can in terms of some of the teaching tips and kinds of things we do. I really think that what’s going to happen pretty soon is there’s so much stuff coming out with AI, real life stuff is going to become something I think people are going to cherish. So the project I’m working on right now is looking more at how I’ve taught in different aspects of it, but what it really is going to boil down to are things that I experienced in the classroom. They’re really kind of unique, interesting things, and then how it played out and how it could be different. And so I had a student one time have a grand mal seizure in my class. And the quick example here is I quickly ran down to a nursing station. It was just around the corner. I ran over there, got somebody, brought them back, and the nurse came back, and we came into the classroom. And I, right now, would tell you… that was my first year of teaching that happened… I would never leave a classroom when an emergency is going on. I should have said to somebody, “Hey, go to the nursing station.” So what I want to do is talk a little bit about what I’ve done, some of the ways I’ve done it, how I would have done it differently, and then how that ties into learning and different aspects. So I really want to make more of a personal story. I don’t know if anybody will be interested in it, but, you know, we’ll give it a try.

Rebecca: Sounds like an interesting book. I’d read it.

Todd: Good. I just sold one. Oooh.

Rebecca: Yeah. [LAUGHTER]

John: Maybe two. [LAUGHTER]

Rebecca: Yeah, maybe two.

Todd: No worries, but thank you, appreciate that.

Rebecca: People have anxiety about, like, what if X, Y and Z happens in my class, and hearing personal stories about how those sorts of things have been addressed and strategies for addressing them, I think eases some worry for folks, so it could fill a gap.

Todd: Yeah, I appreciate you saying that, and I think one of the big ones is that it’s been about 40 years of teaching, and the 40 years of teaching, I think the framework I’m gonna go with, I’ve made almost every mistake you can make, and I still am seen as kind of a person who’s written these books. I do know a lot about teaching, and I’ve learned a lot about it, but you don’t become a better teacher without making mistakes along the way. I don’t think anybody can. And so I’ve done that. And I probably should point out, too, as Lew said, I run around some campuses. I love meeting people and going to campuses. I’ll still keep doing that.

Lew: So Todd, three years ago, I did a column for the MAA, it’s the Mathematical Association America. It’s called Still Learning From My Misstakes. And mistakes was spelled with two S’s, anyway, but yeah, exactly that, that idea of, I think, showing your vulnerability, especially at the part in the career that he’s at, like, oh, Todd Zakrajsek does everything perfect. I think peeling back the curtain and showing the mistakes that we made for the folks who are coming up, that is so refreshing to see that and what we did well and what we didn’t do well, and then kind of examples of moving that forward. So yeah, maybe three books, you might sell three. [LAUGHTER]

Rebecca: Definitely worth the investment now. [LAUGHTER]

Todd: Lew, that will cover my next tea. [LAUGHTER] But thank you, appreciate that.

Rebecca: Well, thank you both for joining us and for sharing your work.

Lew: Thank you so much. Appreciate it. It was fun.

Todd: Appreciate the opportunity.

John: Well, thank you.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

[MUSIC]

427. Open Exchanges in College Classrooms

Ideally, college classrooms provide students with a comfortable but challenging environment in which diverse ideas and viewpoints are openly exchanged; the reality they experience, though, is often quite different. In this episode, David Laibson joins us to discuss how Harvard University is attempting to identify and address barriers to this ideal.

David is the Robert I. Goldman Professor of Economics and a Faculty Dean of Lowell House. He has published dozens of heavily cited articles on a wide range of topics, including behavioral economics, self-regulation, behavior change, household finance, and aging. David is a Research Associate in the Aging, Asset Pricing, and Economic Fluctuations Working Group at the National Bureau of Economic Research, member of the National Bureau of Economic Research, and serves on numerous advisory boards. He has received Harvard’s Phi Beta Kappa award and a Harvard College Professorship in recognition of his high quality teaching. David is also a co-author of popular textbooks on introductory economics and  a co-editor of the Handbook of Behavioral Economics.

Show Notes

Transcript

John: Ideally, college classrooms provide students with a comfortable but challenging environment in which diverse ideas and viewpoints are openly exchanged; the reality they experience, though, is often quite different. In this episode, we discuss how one institution is attempting to identify and address barriers to this ideal.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

John: Our guest today is David Laibson. David is the Robert I. Goldman Professor of Economics and a Faculty Dean of Lowell House. He has published dozens of heavily cited articles on a wide range of topics, including behavioral economics, self-regulation, behavior change, household finance, and aging. David is a Research Associate in the Aging, Asset Pricing, and Economic Fluctuations Working Group at the National Bureau of Economic Research, member of the National Bureau of Economic Research, and serves on numerous advisory boards. He has received Harvard’s Phi Beta Kappa award and a Harvard College Professorship in recognition of his high quality teaching. David is also a co-author of popular textbooks on introductory economics and a co-editor of the Handbook of Behavioral Economics. It’s really an impressive list of things there. Welcome David.

David: Thank you. Glad to be here.

Rebecca: Today’s teas are: David, are you drinking tea with us today?

David: Well, I don’t actually have my tea cup with me right now, but I do have my preferred tea on hand [LAUGHTER] because I knew you would ask. So my favorite tea right now is a Korean matcha called Osulloc, and it comes in a very handy format where I can basically take my matcha tea bag, drop it in my water and have my lovely cup of tea, but I don’t honestly have one right now. [LAUGHTER] So, I thought you were gonna ask about what I like to drink, as opposed to what I’m drinking.

John: And I am drinking a Twinings oolong tea today.

Rebecca: Oh, nice. Must be the end of the semester is getting a little intense with the black teas, huh?

John: It is. [LAUGHTER] I think this is my third or fourth cup today. [LAUGHTER]

Rebecca: I have a decaf Irish breakfast this afternoon.

John: That’s the difference being in the administration. [LAUGHTER]

Rebecca: I have about a week, have about a week. [LAUGHTER]

David: Well, good luck reaching the endline.

John: So, we’ve invited you here today to discuss your work as co-chair of the Classroom Social Compact Committee, which we had read about in an October 6 article in The New York Times. Can you tell us a little bit about this committee?

David: Sure, the committee did most of its work in 2024 and issued its findings report in 2025, early in the year. Maya Jasanoff, another faculty member here at Harvard, is the co-chair of the committee, and our report was both a description of the state of affairs here at Harvard and a set of recommendations for addressing many of the problems that we uncovered or documented. The committee was charged by the Faculty of Arts and Sciences Dean, Hopi Hoekstra, and the charge, I won’t read the whole thing, but it included describing the nature and purpose of the faculty of arts and science classroom and developing practical recommendations for engendering a vibrant learning environment in the classroom.

Rebecca: Can you talk a little bit about some of the primary issues that were raised in the report?

David: So, there’s a long standing recognition that the classrooms here have a aspirational role to play, that perhaps we’re falling short on on many dimensions, and let me review some of them that were discussed and documented in the course of writing our report. So, one thing that we’re concerned about is the degree to which students come to the classroom not completely comfortable sharing what they think when they raise their hand, if they raise their hand. There’s a fair degree of self-censorship, an extent to which people, for various reasons, may not feel comfortable speaking up. It may be that they’re shy and don’t want to say something that might be wrong or that they don’t want to say something that may be viewed critically by other students. And so one aspect of the classroom that is problematic is the degree to which people are not comfortable bringing authentic voices into the classroom setting. Another significant issue is the degree to which our students have, in some cases, focused energies outside the classroom, to the extent that it actually undermines the academic center of their lives here. Now I don’t want to imply that that’s the fault of our students. I think in many cases, that’s a reality that our faculty are not creating classroom experiences that are sufficiently stimulating and therefore engaging our students’ interest. And so I think the un-centering of the classroom, which has been occurring for decades here, is a two-sided phenomenon. On the one hand, it’s students that are focused elsewhere. On the other hand, it’s faculty that may not be creating the most stimulating and exciting environment intellectually in the classroom. And I think we’ve all agreed, unfortunately, that that’s okay, and this report is part of reversing that consensus and reasserting the principles that I think we would agree with, but haven’t always been our practice here at Harvard.

John: And I think what you’re describing is something that we’ve seen at pretty much all institutions, to some extent. But one of the things that really impressed me about the report was the extent to which you gathered data and the ways in which you gathered data, because that could be a useful model for other institutions as well. Could you talk a little bit about what types of data you gathered and the process of assembling that?

David: So we did a year of data gathering, and as you point out, it was pretty aggressive and extensive. We wanted to make sure that we really had our finger on the pulse of the many different communities and the many different stakeholders, so we held well over 30 group listening sessions, and then I would say, hundreds of one-on-one listening sessions, where you sit down with a student and have a one- hour lunch and get a full download from them in the most confidential setting, where it’s just a one-on-one conversation, as opposed to someone volunteering an opinion with 40 other people in the room, which can be a little daunting. We also consulted with colleagues and consulted with many different committees that sit here in the Faculty of Arts and Sciences that oversee our curriculum. So the Educational Policy Committee, the Graduate Policy Committee, the General Education Committee, a place called The Bok center, that is a sort of mentorship for teachers unit, and we talked with department chairs. We talked with divisional deans. So we really went out there and gathered a lot of data. In addition, we looked at 11 different surveys that were fielded either by us or by other groups inside Harvard, measuring undergraduate opinions, graduate opinions, faculty opinions, alumni opinions, and that is the maximally confidential space for people to give answers, because a lot of these surveys are done without any ability to identify the respondent other than knowing that they are, in fact, a Harvard affiliate, because they got into the survey using a Harvard ID. So we looked at five undergraduate surveys, three graduate student surveys, one faculty survey and two alumni surveys, and by that point, we had a lot of data that would enable us to, I think, have a fairly precise understanding of at least what the community thought and what they were willing to share with us in these different formats.

Rebecca: So, you mentioned the self-censorship issue that bubbled up across all of these different audiences that you surveyed and collected data from. What are some of the consequences in terms of student intellectual development?

David: So there’s a lot of adverse consequences. One is the obvious problem that students don’t feel, in many cases, that they belong, because their perspective is not welcome, and that, I think, undermines their ability to thrive. They’re also not developing the critical skill of learning how to speak publicly. If they’re constantly suppressing their voice in these public settings, and the classroom setting, then that’s a skill that isn’t being nurtured. I think perhaps one of the most important problems with a classroom where people don’t feel that they can say what they really think is that there’s this false impression of consensus when in fact there are enormously divergent viewpoints. They’re just invisible because most people that are speaking are speaking in a relatively narrow domain with respect to maybe the most sensitive issues. So when you have a classroom that is a place of self-censorship, and I want to emphasize many classrooms don’t have that problem. But when you have a classroom where people are self- censoring, you get a false impression of homogeneity. You get a set of skills that are not being developed. You get many students feeling that they’re just there on a performative basis, and it undermines the whole intellectual enterprise. We’re here to learn and really compare ideas while all that’s out the window when you have the impression, and again, this is only in some classrooms, that there’s a kind of acceptable viewpoint, and anything that sits outside that viewpoint you better keep quiet about. But I want to emphasize, a lot of people think that the way the law is laid down is through faculty and graduate student teaching fellows. Indeed, the students told us that mostly they were concerned about what their fellow students thought. So, if anyone has the impression [LAUGHTER] that this is a sort of monoculture problem that is driven by or primarily by instructors, I want to, right from the start, clarify that overwhelmingly, the students said that in many cases, it was fellow students and their judgments and what would happen after class in the dining halls that they were most concerned about with respect to saying something that might be unpopular in class, and not the bad grade they might get. Indeed, I was quite happy to hear that the faculty were the people that the students were the least concerned about. So I think there’s more concern about some of the graduate students that are grading their papers in a big class, but especially there’s concern about their fellow students. Now that’s not to say that the faculty don’t have any role to play in changing this equilibrium. Definitely, the faculty need to change norms and need to lead with their voice this new approach to a classroom where more perspectives are sought out and encouraged and welcomed, but it is, I think, important to emphasize that it’s not just the faculty that are contributing to self- censorship, it is fear of what other students are going to say in the dining hall after class.

John: One of the more striking statistics there was that in one of the surveys, 33% of Harvard’s college students reported that they felt free to express personal feelings and belief, as you’ve noted, a lot of students are self-censoring. However, there were some other statistics based on individual course evaluations that suggested a much lower rate. How was that explained in the report, that discrepancy between the reports from seniors and the individual course summaries.

David: Yeah. So just to highlight the tension, if you ask people about their overall academic experience, only a third say they were comfortable speaking openly, but when you ask them about the individual course that they just took, so ask them about one course, and you get about 90% saying that they’re comfortable speaking openly. So clearly, what we’re learning here is that this is not a problem that people are experiencing everywhere, all the time. It’s a problem they’re experiencing in some places. So when you ask people, as they’re leaving after four years, what was it like? Did you feel the need to self-censor? They say, “Yeah, sometimes.” But when you ask them about the class they took last semester on 19th century history of Brazil, they say, “No, actually, in that class, I did not feel the need to self-censor.” So, the distinction, I think that’s important to highlight, is that it’s not a problem that’s occurring all the time for our students. It’s a problem that’s occurring frequently enough that it’s a real concern, but not so frequently that it’s affecting every curricular experience. And I think that speaks to a couple issues. First, the problem is somewhat contained. But secondly, there probably is a degree of intellectual self- segregation that is contributing to the sense of, “Well, it’s not a problem in my class.” Sometimes I ask students, “Well, what happened in your class? What was the curriculum?” And they’ll describe a relatively homogeneous student body in that class. And then I’m not surprised that if the classes has advertised itself as having a particular viewpoint, and the students get that message early on, and the students that want that viewpoint stay, and the students that don’t want that viewpoint move on, you can easily see how people might say, “Yeah, in that class that I took, I had no trouble saying what was on my mind.” But then one realizes that in parentheses, that’s because the class ended up attracting a relatively homogeneous set of perspectives in the student body. And so I do think all of these considerations make it challenging to know exactly how deep the problem is. I definitely think we can over-exaggerate it if we just cite the 33% number of people that feel comfortable speaking their mind. But I think we can also kind of over minimize it [LAUGHTER] by saying if you look at individual courses, 90% of the students say that in the particular course they are evaluating right now, they feel free to speak their mind. We don’t know how much of that is a kind of self- segregation into curricular environments that they feel comfortable in.

Rebecca: What are some strategies, maybe both structural or also within a class, to work against this?

David: Well, I think you start with awareness as an instructor, I think instructors don’t realize the degree to which their students feel pressure from other students to accept a kind of student-endorsed viewpoint. And I think faculty are trying very hard to have real conversations in their classrooms, and are often working to prevent their own viewpoint from becoming, in some sense, the only acceptable viewpoint. They’re not necessarily jumping out on day one and saying, “This is what I think,” they’re creating space for student perspectives. They’re working hard on that front, but they don’t realize that it’s not just that students are trying to glom on to what the faculty member thinks, it’s what the other students think that is a real issue. And so I think faculty need to be explicit in saying, “Hey, in this classroom environment, we really encourage diverse perspectives, and I’m going to be thoughtful in drawing them out.” And so I’ll give you examples of how we do that in my class. You probably have both have the experience of that wonderful student who is always quick to get their hand up right away, and if we always call the students who get their hands up in the first five seconds when we ask a question, or when we open it up for questions, we tend to get a relatively homogeneous set of answers because it’s the same students that we’re privileging. They’re the students who get their hands up the quickest. And if we call them, once there are a few hands up, well, we’re going to over sample the same students. And so one thing that we do in my classes, we, by that, I mean me and my co instructors… we try to let the question settle and not pick someone immediately. And I have something called the 10-second rule, where once I ask a question, I’ll count to 10 in my head, quietly, and only then, when I’ve allowed 10 seconds to pass, do I finally start picking from the hands that are up. And at that point there’s a lot of hands up, and I have my pick of students, and I can go for students that have not been contributing so far in that lecture, or so far, even in that semester. So I love the ability to bring in this far more diverse set of student voices by just giving them time to get a question together. And I think there’s lots of ways that faculty can launch a more diverse conversation by not allowing a small set of voices to become the dominant voices, and by looking for opinions that lean a different way than the first opinion you got. So you can ask a question, and some student says, “Well, I think A,” and you can ask, “Well, who thinks not A?” And then you can draw in the range of opinions, rather than allowing the first student to say, “I think A” and then the second student to say, “I think A too,” and then the third student “I think A three,” and everyone thinks a. And that’s pretty much the herding effect you don’t want. And you can be very intentional in creating an anti-herding effect by only asking for questions or perspectives that create the heterogeneity that you’re trying to engender, rather than allowing students to herd on the first answer that comes out of the room. So I think there’s a range of strategies, and they had to be launched on day one to get the equilibrium right in the classroom. Students need to hear the message early on and hear it repeatedly, that this is a place where we’re looking to hear from different perspectives, and we’re not trying to all agree on something. I am very disappointed when I hear [LAUGHTER] faculty telling me about how much agreement there is in their classroom and how excited they are by that. I think when everyone’s agreeing on something, it’s probably a mundane thing, or they’re observing false agreement. There’s enormous disagreement among our students, and if you know how to draw it out, you’ll get it. And if you get everyone to agree together that something is true, well, I ask you, what does everyone agree on that isn’t something that’s utterly trivial.

John: One of the things I’ve done in my classes is I do a lot of polling, but also I have a Catchbox, one of those little cubes with a microphone in it. And when I’m asking questions where there is likely to get a lot of diversity, I’ll wander up to the back of the room because that’s where the students are most likely to sit who are least likely to volunteer and either hand it to them or toss it down the aisle a bit, because the same students always sit up front with their hands raised all the time, and students in the back, at least in my class, are much less likely to ever raise their hand, no matter how many other people have done so. I think one of the things you recommend perhaps using the Bok Center to have people work on alternative teaching strategies to draw out some of these things.

David: Yeah, we do some of the things that you just described. We also sometimes kind of insist on questions from the back of the room. And we also have something called a pre-lecture activity where we get everyone to anonymously answer polls or play games or do something that we’ve created before the lecture. And it’s amazing how much variation you get on these pre- lecture activities. And then everyone in class is astounded when we show them the histograms of responses, and they realize, “Wow, I thought everyone agreed with me and now I realize half the class has a totally different viewpoint.” And it’s not just now a hand or two, they’re seeing data that represents the entire distribution of people in the class, and everyone says that’s the thing they remember the most from the semester, seeing their own data and realizing how different their own perspective is from that of everyone else in the class. And it’s an eye opener.

Rebecca: One of the other things you mentioned earlier was the self selection into classes. Do you have some strategies to encourage folks to explore more things? [LAUGHTER]

David: Yeah, so certainly that’s advice that I give all my students. I’m not sure that that’s [LAUGHTER] the best way to get that advice to be accepted, just sharing it. I certainly take the view that if you are taking a class that’s just going to tell you what you already believe about the world, you’re less likely to be learning than by taking a class that might challenge your preconceptions. That said, I think one thing that instructors should do, in my view… of course, they have academic freedom, so they’re free to decide whether they want to do this… but I would encourage it as good pedagogy, is to offer a range of perspectives in a class and to, themselves, offer the alternative view on an issue, as opposed to the view that is the maybe main thrust of the course. Indeed, I do this myself, I’ll give students the range of evidence on an issue, and I’ll say some scholars think this, and here’s why they think this, and some scholars think this, and here’s why they think this, and here’s the body of evidence that we have, and you can see all the different empirical estimates that have been generated in scholarship in the last 15 years, and so we’re going to be very candid with you about the limitations of what we know and how scholarship has yielded different answers, rather than picking the study that I most like, that is most aligned with my personal viewpoint and teaching it that way. I think good pedagogy goes hand in hand with acknowledging the range of viewpoints that exist in the scholarly community and being forthright that there isn’t a single viewpoint that happens to match my own that is the right approach. And we even have a lecture in the introductory economics class on epistemics, where we talk about the limits of our knowledge and all the ways in which our own views have evolved as we’ve professionally been exposed to more data, seen new research, changed our minds, and so we try to model for our students this concept that there isn’t a set of truths carved on stone that we’re going to hand them. And I would recommend to colleagues that they teach their classes that way. And I think students should also think about learning that way. If they think that they have already discovered the truths carved in stone at age 19, [LAUGHTER] well, they’re in for a big surprise about how the world works. They’re never going to find those truths carved in stone, and they certainly don’t have them already at age 19. So I think we need to message that more in our classrooms.

John: One of the things you’ve mentioned is that students don’t always feel free to express their opinions, but there was also in the report a discussion of student motivation, student engagement, and the relative emphasis that students put on the classes versus the social life and extramural activities. In the report, there’s a number of recommendations, one of which you’ve already discussed in terms of changing how we teach in the classroom. But what are some of the other recommendations of the committee relating to these two issues in terms of getting more students engaged in class and putting more of an emphasis on class, as well as perhaps being more free to express their thoughts in class.

David: I don’t want to create too strong an impression of certitude here we are saying in the report that recentering the classroom, recentering academics, is an important goal going forward, and indeed, we’re already making progress this year where I’m seeing tangible changes in this current academic year, which is really giving me a lot of encouragement That said, the extracurricular life is rich and serves many purposes. So we’re not trying to convey the message that all of that should be shunted aside and people should focus exclusively on their academic lives. I think it’s about finding the right balance, and for some students they’re already well balanced, and for other students, maybe they’re unbalanced with a search for courses that ask very little of them. They’re called gems here at Harvard, g-e-m, and that means low work, high grade, and so maybe not so many gems should be offered, and maybe students shouldn’t seek out a course that is called a gem, and if people feel that they’re so busy out of class extracurricularly and they’re searching for gems, that that’s a sign that maybe the balance hasn’t quite been found for that student. So I think that we should, as a community, ask ourselves, “Well, what courses are famous for having a low lift of work and a very high grade distribution?” and then sort of ask, “Is that the sort of course that we want to be offering?” And that means that for that kind of curriculum, maybe we ask more of our students. Maybe the readings are more demanding, maybe the grading is tougher. So I think that there’s some suggestion to the community of instructors that we might think about raising our standards. And there, we’re thinking about what we ask our students to do out of class, what we ask our students to do even in class. So there’s the cell phone that’s inevitably taking the student’s attention away from what’s happening in the classroom and then 75 minutes have gone by, and you ask the student as they’re leaving the room about what just happened, and because they were parallel processing through the whole thing, they actually didn’t get very much out of it, and 75 minutes were spent kind of scrolling some social media app, and the student might think they got a lot out of that 75 minutes, but in fact, it’s very hard to do two things mentally at the same time. So I think we need to create more stimulating classrooms, more demanding classrooms with respect to assignments, we need to not create a classroom where there are so many A’s that the student can essentially only distinguish themselves by joining the consulting club outside of class and putting all their energy into that. So I think that there’s a lot to be done by instructors in creating a more exciting classroom, a classroom where excellence is acknowledged with higher grades, and it’s not that the norm is an A. I think students might also ask themselves, is the best use of their four years here to focus on things that are happening outside of our classes rather than inside our classes. And if the answer from the students is, well, actually, it’s better outside the class, then I think the faculty need to double down on making the in-classroom experience better. So a lot for us to think about as teachers, and our obligation to create an exciting curriculum that makes students thrilled to come to class. That should really happen. I mean, students should not come to class grudgingly. They should come to class with excitement because something interesting is going to happen, because there’ll be a conversation that will be memorable, because they’ll have an insight that they’ll take with them for the rest of their lives. I mean, classrooms are some of the most remarkable, extraordinary experiences one can have in a lifetime. And if it’s not that, then it’s on us faculty to up our game and create these experiences that are so memorable, that are so transformative, that are so important in the development of our students, that students are actually eager to be there and are not going only because attendance is being taken. Though I might take attendance if that’s a problem too, but for sure, the goal is a classroom that is a wondrous experience, that is the highlight of one’s life, that is sad as you leave it behind and graduate from college. Graduating from college should be, on one part, an exciting moment to move on with your life, and on the other hand, a very sad moment when you’re leaving behind this incredible opportunity to sample intellectually four courses that are life changing every semester. Well, let’s create those courses together.

Rebecca: I think a life changing course, seems like some faculty might have some imposter syndrome [LAUGHTER] around being able to achieve that. Can you talk a little bit more about some of the strategies in the class to make that engaging experience where students maybe don’t want to interact with their phones and they want to fully participate in class.

David: Well, I think students, by and large, do want to participate in class. I think the phone is sort of like a drug and everyone says, “Well, I don’t want to be a heroin addict in five years. I’m going to quit between now and then.” And of course, it’s very hard to quit the addiction. I think phones have a lot of those addictive properties. You enter the classroom thinking, “Gosh, I really need to focus.” I mean, this is my own experience as a student. There weren’t cell phones, but there were plenty of things that one could let one’s mind wander to. So I always enter the classroom intending to take good notes and really focus and not get distracted and learn intensively, and often I found myself drifting off. So we’re all easily distracted, and the cell phone is easy distraction on steroids. So I think students want to learn, and I think we need to create environments that facilitate that learning and make it easy. There’s so many classes that I’ve attended where literally, I was on the edge of my seat through the whole thing and excited because there was something important being said, some conversation with students, among students, between students and faculty, that kept me engaged. And I think students want that. I don’t think they are eager to spend these four years blowing off their courses. I think that is something that happens as a unintended consequence of all the other things they’re doing, like the conversation with a roommate that starts at 11pm and doesn’t end till 3am and after four hours of debating every single philosophical issue under the sun, you finally go to bed, and then, for your 9 am class, you’re very sleepy, and you get to the 9 am class having not gotten enough sleep, and you’re barely awake. That student was excited to be debating philosophy at two o’clock in the morning, and unfortunately, got to class in a drowsy state because of it. They’re not intellectually unengaged, but they’re still not going to really thrive in that classroom because of the sleeping that they didn’t get. So my sense is that students want to learn, and we just need to help create environments where it’s conducive to learning, where being in class isn’t going to put you to sleep, it’s actually going to wake you up, because so many exciting things are happening with respect to what is being said, debates that are taking place in real time, opportunities to ask questions, moments where we’re all on the edge of our seat because a student is actually pushing back on a faculty member on some issue and there’s a interesting dialog happening, maybe students also interacting with each other on some issue that is being discussed in the class, and so there’s a conversation, there’s issues that are surprises, there’s intellectual turns that were unexpected, there’s data that’s surprising, there’s ideas that are engaging. I mean, these are all aligned with what our students want. And I think the problem is often they come to class, and actually it’s a pretty boring lecture, and that’s not their mistake, that’s ours.

John: And along the lines of mobile devices, one of the things recommended in the policy is that mobile devices be either banned or discouraged, except in the cases of documented disabilities or when they’re being used actively for some component to the class. And in your class, the article mentioned that you had a device- free zone, but many people chose not to sit there. How can we encourage students, perhaps, to not use mobile devices?

David: I want to be clear, the policy in our class is no cell phones anywhere, so that’s a universal ban across the entire classroom, but we do allow students to use laptops and to use iPads if they want to. Though we also have a iPad and laptop free zone, I struggle with the question of laptop and iPad use, because for many students, they, I think, legitimately view it as an aid for learning, just a regular academic experience, I like to take my notes on an iPad, for example, as opposed to any need to use an iPad. So, I’m open to students doing that. I do warn them that it’s a slippery slope. Once you have the laptop open, you’re one click away from all the distractions and temptations of the internet, and that will really undermine your teaching. And what we do in our class is we actually hand out photocopies of the slides so they can commit to keep their laptop closed by simply using our photocopies and taking notes with a pen on our photocopies. And most of our students do that. That said, I think there are students that want the hybrid experience, and probably some who are taking advantage of being in a laptop allowed zone or iPad allowed zone to occasionally check out and check into their email or everything else that’s happening. So I’m torn about exactly how to handle the classroom environment. I’m open to professors that are going to do a complete ban. I think that’s fine. Obviously there’s accommodations, and we, I think, need to be mindful of that, but a complete ban outside of accommodations. But I’m also open to saying, “Hey, these young people need to learn how to develop this skill of living in a distracting world, and maybe part of developing that skill is realizing that after 75 minutes in the classroom, they have gotten nothing out of a lecture because they found themselves doing one thing after another on their laptop.” And so there is an upside to the distraction, which is a little bit of growing self awareness, which emerges as people begin to discover that we think pretty serially and cannot think consciously on parallel streams, and consequently that skill set of learning how to operate in this distracting world is developed in a room that allows them to use these electronic devices, though I think the cell phone is just so obviously destructive that I’m happy to nix that.

Rebecca: The policies that completely ban all devices except for accommodations… are we kind of skirting or dancing around issues of privacy when it comes to students’ disability status and things like that.

David: Yeah, so that’s a real issue. I mean, I think I’m still comfortable with having that policy, but I think you make a good point.

Rebecca: So we certainly encourage folks to read the full report, to dig into the details, but we always wrap up by asking, what’s next?

David: You don’t change the momentum of a university overnight. So I think writing a report is a great step, and now there’s lots and lots of work to be done to both evaluate the merits of the arguments in that report, and to the extent the arguments have merit, to change our culture, and some of those changes come with legislation, which indeed, Harvard has passed. There’s new language in the undergraduate handbook, which is in the report and mentions a lot of the things that I’ve discussed, including other things that I haven’t discussed, like Chatham House rules in class to give people more comfort speaking authentically. Chatham House rules, as I think your listeners know, is a policy of non-attribution so people can say things in class, experiment with new ideas without being afraid that it’s going to show up on a social media post five minutes after class ends with their name attached to it. So legislation, policy making, culture change, rules that align with the messages that I’ve said, like, how much do we allow pass/fai… Harvard is restricting the degree to which students can take pass/fail courses, not eliminating it, but reducing the freedom to do that as frequently as students did so in the past… finding ways to implement and enforce policies that ban electronic devices in the classroom or at least limit their usage, figuring out where the sweet spot is, and all of that, changing the norm so students get comfortable with difficult conversations, not just in the classroom but also in the dining halls, creating a classroom culture where we’re excited to talk with people who disagree with us, rather than horrified to interact with someone who doesn’t share our viewpoints. I’m seeing all these things actually happening in real time. There’s more and more willingness, just in the last year, for people to say what they think, and we have a lot of work to do. It’s not that culture change happens overnight, but we’re, I think, broadly, moving in that direction, even though there’s individual instances where I’m quite unhappy and still concerned about the freedom of speech on our campuses. So it’s sort of two steps forward, one step backward. But we didn’t get here overnight, and we’re not going to get out of the place we are in overnight. Let’s keep working on these issues and thinking about how we make our academic environments healthy and productive and engaged, and how we create classrooms that people are super excited to have the opportunity to enter and sad when the 32 courses are over and they’re off to the rest of their lives. College should be an extraordinary privilege and an academically delightful one, and getting back to that place, if we were ever there, is going to take some work.

John: Well, all the things that you’ve discussed, I think, pretty much all colleges are facing and it’s nice to see the actions that you’re taking. And I think a lot of institutions could benefit from exploring these approaches.

David: Thank you.

John: And we will include a link to the report in the show notes, as well as a link to the New York Times article that provoked our interest in this topic.

Rebecca: Yeah.

David: In the New York Times article, I will say one thing, it puts a fair bit of emphasis on the students. I don’t think that’s the right balance. I think we need to put a lot of emphasis on what the faculty are or are not doing to create a stimulating classroom environment that will, in this dance between the student and the instructor, create a combined commitment to all the things that we’ve discussed, and just saying the students need to be more academically inclined, I think, is the wrong message, and the New York Times article seemed to have a little bit of that tone.

Rebecca: I appreciate your emphasis on actionable items, and as members of our institutions, we can only control the actions that we can take. [LAUGHTER]

David: That’s right, we’re going to make all of this better by creating classrooms that are exciting to be in.

John: And at least move in that direction as much as we can.

David: Yeah, I’m pretty optimistic, actually. I think there are some people that are just brilliant, charismatic teachers, and it’s impossible to copy and paste that. But there’s also a bunch of low-hanging fruit that doesn’t involve being a charismatic instructor, that can create the classroom environment that’s exciting to be in. I actually think that we can create experiences that are very meaningful for our students by sort of working down a long list of check boxes for classrooms that have the right ingredients for engaged learning and active learning.

John: Well, thank you. We very much appreciate you joining us.

David: Thank you. Great to meet the two of you.

Rebecca: Thank you.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing Assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]

421. Why the Magic Matters

Disney is a common shared cultural experience. In this episode, Jill Peterfeso joins us to discuss how Disney’s pixie dust can hook students and provide opportunities for critical examination in a variety of disciplines. Jill is the Eli Franklin Craven and Minnie Phipps Craven Professor of Religious Studies at Guilford College. She is the author of Womanpriest: Tradition and Transgression in the Contemporary Roman Catholic Church and a co-editor of Why the Magic Matters: Discovering Disney as a Laboratory for Learning.

Show Notes

  • Peterfeso, J. (2020). Womanpriest: Tradition and Transgression in the Contemporary Roman Catholic Church (p. 285). Fordham University Press.
  • Franzese, A., & Peterfeso, J. (Eds.). (2025). Why the Magic Matters: Discovering Disney as a Laboratory for Learning. Bloomsbury Publishing USA.
  • Twinings Tea Caddy at EPCOT.
  • Jill Peterfeso (2021). Leveraging Disney Magic. Tea for Teaching podcast. Episode 207. September 29.
  • The Disney Dish podcast
  • Steele, Bruce (2019). One Day at Disney: Meet the People Who Make the Magic Across the Globe. Disney.
  • Giroux, H. A., & Pollock, G. (2010). The mouse that roared: Disney and the end of innocence. Bloomsbury Publishing PLC.
  • C, Eric Lincoln and (0awrence H. Mamiya (1990). The Black Church in the African American Experience. Duke University Press.
  • Snyder, T. (2021). On tyranny graphic edition: Twenty lessons from the twentieth century. Ten Speed Graphic.

Transcript

John: Disney is a common shared cultural experience. In this episode we discuss how Disney’s pixie dust can hook students and provide opportunities for critical examination in a variety of disciplines.

[MUSIC]

John: Thanks for joining us for Tea for Teaching, an informal discussion of innovative and effective practices in teaching and learning.

Rebecca: This podcast series is hosted by John Kane, an economist…

John: …and Rebecca Mushtare, a graphic designer…

Rebecca: …and features guests doing important research and advocacy work to make higher education more inclusive and supportive of all learners.

[MUSIC]

John: Our guest today Jill Peterfeso. Jill is the Eli Franklin Craven and Minnie Phipps Craven Professor of Religious Studies at Guilford College. She is the author of Womanpriest: Tradition and Transgression in the Contemporary Roman Catholic Church and a co-editor of Why the Magic Matters: Discovering Disney as a Laboratory for Learning. Welcome back, Jill.

Jill: Thank you. It’s so good to be back. I’m really happy to see you guys again.

John: It’s really nice to talk to you. It’s been too long

Jill: It has. How are you, Rebecca?

Rebecca: I’m doing well. It’s been far too long for sure. Today’s teas are:… Jill, are you drinking some tea with us today?

Jill: I am. I just got it ready. This is an apricot tea. It is a light black tea by Harney and Sons. It’s really delicious. What about you guys?

John: I’m drinking a black raspberry green tea today.

Rebecca: And I have English tea time today. Very good… from England again?

Rebecca: No, it’s not my super fancy stuff, it’s grocery store, too. Sorry.

John: Recently she’s been bringing you these tea she’s picked up at Scotland or in England and other places during her travels. My travels are usually to Wegmans or to Amazon.

Rebecca: …those far, far away places.

John: …although very soon I will be stopping at the Twinings Tea Caddy in Epcot.

Jill: I’m so excited.

John: …which brings us to the theme of today’s podcast, which is your work on Why the Magic Matters. In an earlier podcast, you had described how you had incorporated Disney into several of your classes, including a travel component, but this new book extends this work in some new directions. First, though, before we talk about the book, could you tell us a little bit about how you developed an interest in Disney as an area of academic interest.

Jill: I came to Disney as an area of academic interest through teaching. It was 2014-2015 and I was asked to develop a first-year seminar, which is this class that all first- year students take, introduces them to college, introduces them to the liberal arts. But sort of the catch is, we don’t want it to be too clearly in your area of expertise. So it couldn’t be about American religious history, which is my area of expertise. It couldn’t be about Catholicism and women, which I’ve written a book on. It needed to be something that was going to be an area of discovery for me, as well as my students. And as a lifelong Disney fan, I thought Disney would be a really fun class to teach to first years, and I think it would be a good hook. I think they’d want to take that class. I developed that class. I taught it for the first time in fall 2015, and it really was an amazing opportunity to discover something in a back- door way. It wasn’t like, “Okay, I have this whole huge foundation that I developed through grad school and years of research and training from the experts. This is really like me doing a deep dive into something that I’ve always been curious about, and inviting students in on the journey.” That’s how I came about it. I taught that first class, and I taught that FYS, gosh, I think four or five times since then, I’ve also gone on to teach a couple other classes. I taught a class on Disney narrative magic that was a cross-listed English religion class. And then I’ve taught two study away classes on Disney that involved a trip component. I’ve gotten to do a lot of things with Disney, which is really exciting. What I didn’t expect when I first started teaching Disney was that it was going to turn into an area of academic interest and research. And I really happened, probably, I think about my second time teaching that first-year seminar, I found that we were having conversations in the classroom about these issues that I talk about in my American religious history classes and other things that I research and study and share with students. And so it was becoming clear to me that there was an alignment of Disney with my other research on Americanness and what people believe and why and how American history gives rise to culture. And so really, since about 2019 as I was finishing up Womanpriest, my first book, I’ve been thinking about ways to turn Disney into something academic. Teaching blended in with a lot of my own personal biography, like I was one of those kids who had The VHS tapes as a kid. We had the records, the little mini records in the books, and they were Disney stories. And I got to go to Disney World when I was eight, and it changed my life, like that that place existed was really mind blowing to me. So it’s been just like a really happy accident of all these things coming together, and it really makes sense as an area of academic focus. I don’t think many of us who do Disney studies do that in grad school. I think a lot of our grad advisors would be like, “Really?” but it’s something that we find once we’re a little more established and trying to find cool things that grab student attention. Disney works for that really well.

Rebecca: Can you talk a little bit about the origins of this particular book project, Why the Magic Matters?

Jill: Credit goes to a podcast, [LAUGHTER] actually. I was listening to a podcast I listen to religiously. It’s called the Disney Dish with Jim Hill and Len Testa. And I was driving home, I have quite a commute to and from school, and I was driving home from school and listening to the weekly podcast. And they were talking about this class at Elon University on Te aching Disney, and it involved a trip to Walt Disney World. The class was called, like, The Science of Happiness. And I’m like, That’s Elon University. I’m literally driving by Elon University on my way back home. So Elon is very close to Guilford College, where I teach. I did some research. I’m like, I got to figure out who teaches this class. I did some diving into their website, and found that the teacher of this class is a sociologist at Elon named Alexis Franzese. I reached out to her over email. We met up, and I was thinking at the time, this was early 2023 and I was prepping to teach a Disney away class later that spring. And I was like, let’s team up. We could write an article about teaching Disney, especially in difficult political times, because this was when Disney was in a very public fight with Florida Governor Ron DeSantis about the don’t say gay bill, etc. And Alexis said, well, let’s do an edited volume. And so that was sort of the birth of the edited volume piece of this.

John: So how did you select the contributors for this book?

Jill: Once we had agreed on a premise, which is like educators of Disney courses and content sharing their research with a wider audience, we wanted to be sure that we had a range of academic disciplines represented. We wanted to surprise and delight the reader, the reader of Disney fans and also students, to find how many ways that Disney speaks to academic disciplines, and how many academic disciplines can speak to Disney. So early on, I will admit to some fan girling. I’m like, okay, who’s doing the scholarship on Disney that I really love? And I reached out to them. Thankfully, they were in agreement and they wanted to participate. Alexis did some of the same. We talked to people who we’d gotten in and said, “Who else can you recommend?” So we really reached out to people, and then got people sort of through that snowball approach. We didn’t do a call for papers. We didn’t need to. We were thinking we might need to, but it was exciting how quickly professors, faculty, researchers doing this work, wanted to be involved. And I think that speaks to the energy and enthusiasm around Disney and teaching and sharing Disney. I think for almost everyone… I can’t speak for everybody… but I think there’s, like a passion piece to scholarship on Disney and sharing that with students and wider audiences. We really wanted it to be widely represented. I wish we had the hard sciences in the book. It’s one of the only areas that I feel is lacking. But, I have a list, so if you’ll allow me, this is our very impressive array of disciplines: we have curriculum studies, art history, business and marketing, data science, film history, indigenous studies, Asian studies, literature, education studies, leadership studies, history, media studies, religious studies, psychology, sociology and disability studies. We’re really happy and really proud of that array of voices.

Rebecca: So one of the things that you mentioned earlier was that Disney is a good hook to get students involved. And in your first chapter, you talk about how Disney can relate to any academic subject, [LAUGHTER] and you’ve just outlined the wide array of those that are in your book. Can you talk about some examples of how Disney can be relevant in these multiple disciplines?

Jill: There is this Disney+ show, and it is also a book that is produced by like Disney Publishing. It’s called One Day at Disney, and it looks at a huge range of careers that are available through the Disney company, like what is happening 24/7 around the globe with Disney, and I talk about that a little bit in the introduction. With that as an example, it starts to open your eyes to all the ways Disney demands investment and involvement from all these different… we could call them academic disciplines… but areas of expertise for their cast members and their employees. In the book, some examples like we have two people in our book talking about data science. So we have Len Testa, who wrote our forward, he of The Disney Dish, and Lucy D’Agostino McGowan. They talk about data science at Disney. A day in a Disney park is full of data, and what Lucy does in her chapter is to look at all this data for one ride at Epcot, Spaceship Earth, and looks at what Disney can do with that data, and also what she does in the classroom with that data and teaching her students how data analysis works, what Disney can do, this is how Disney decides where to place cast members, how Disney obtains and posts these up to minute wait times for rides and attractions, and then what guests can do with that data if they use an app that sort of is tracking wait times and busyness et cetera. Looking at data helps to understand how one plans out a day at a Disney park. That’s one chapter, another chapter that’s rooted in American history and film studies is from historian Sarah Nilsen, and she looks at Walt Disney’s biography and focuses on his love for animals, and how his love for animals got baked into what he was creating in his films, and the characters and the lives that film goers were invited to see, and she makes an argument that Walt became one of America’s first 20th century environmentalists because his passion for animals was then put into films, and later into parks, and that inspired Americans to think differently about the environment. Then one other example is my co-editor, Alexis, teamed up with one of her former students who had taken one of her Disney travel courses, which I think is awesome that that partnership even exists in the book, and they use sociology and psychology tools and frameworks to analyze what Disney expects and demands from parkgoers to enjoy their time at Disney. You don’t just show up at Disney… anybody who’s gone to a Disney park knows you don’t just show up and everything happens seamlessly. You have to do a lot of labor. And in this chapter, where they’re using psychology and sociology, they look at concepts like emotional labor, emotion work, impression management to look at how Disney recruits people, especially parents, to help create happiness, to make magic happen on Disney trips. As I think of it, all of our authors are peeling back the curtain of how Disney works and inviting them to see what Disney is doing that is not just surface fun entertainment, but there’s a lot to it, and how that works, and how we can think about it as critical educated thinkers.

John: One of the things that we’ve talked about quite a bit in the past year or so on the podcast is that there’s a lot of evidence that students feel less connected than in past decades to what they’re learning in college, that they feel that it doesn’t really connect to their own lives or their own experiences. Given Disney’s large role and very long-term role in our culture, does that help provide that sort of shared connection to students, getting them more engaged? You’ve already alluded to this a little bit, but how has this worked in terms of students making connections and becoming engaged with the course.

Jill: Definitely Disney is a common shared cultural experience. And even international students know of Disney, and that is a great foundation for students in a first-year seminar, for instance, because they’re already going to be connected in some personal way to the material. We have a shared recognition, if not a shared love of Disney, certainly not every student who takes the Disney class loves Disney. Honestly, a lot of them think this is going to be really easy, [LAUGHTER] and that’s why they take it. I’ve had them admit that to me, they’re often surprised by how deeply you can go into Disney, but they are hooked by the familiarity. I’m a big believer in Disney content, especially for early students, or discovering students, because Disney is something that they know well enough that they can feel smart about it, like a lot of my students are first generation, and Disney is not intimidating subject matter. So I like to think that students comfort with knowing some parts of Disney means that I can really push them on their critical thinking because they’re grounded, or they’re rooted in something familiar: magic, happy endings, characters, positive stories about the world, histories of America, like they’re grounded in something. Now, all of this said, I have had a couple students who take my Disney classes who complain like, this doesn’t mean anything to my life, and that’s where I really try to drive home the liberal arts-ness, like, “Okay, but this is like a training ground for your academic and intellectual muscles.” Like, when you read the introduction of Why the Magic Matters, you see a lot of my views on this creeping into that introduction where I’m like, “Okay, it’s not that you need to know how Disney works. Like, I think you should, because it’s a huge cultural artifact, but you need to know how to think deeply about these cultural artifacts.” The only other thing I’ll say as I think about the shared cultural understanding, I am going to be curious to see what happens with Disney and the shared culture in the next 5 to 10 to 20 years, because Disney is becoming prohibitively expensive… at least visits to the park are. This has been well tracked. Disney seems to aim for an income bracket of like in the top 10, top 5% and most of us are not in that. So I increasingly now see students who have never been to Disney parks, like that middle class pilgrimage idea that I know I grew up with is increasingly unreachable. So I’m going to be curious to see what that does to those of us who try to teach this content in a range of different academic settings. Some people teach Disney classes in very affluent schools with very affluent students, and then some of us don’t. I wonder what Disney’s shifting economics are going to mean for lower SES students. Yes, shared culture now, I don’t know if that’s always going to be the case, so that’s something for us to watch.

Rebecca: You mentioned earlier that Disney’s biography kind of finds its way in your book. Can you talk a little bit about how Disney argued that animation and film would be useful for educational tools, and there’s certainly evidence of this in the theme parks and other things. However, it’s a very curated approach. How does that impact our understanding of history, or the way that we might continue to perpetuate a version of history in our culture?

Jill: This is where I get really excited as a cultural historian. This is where I really like to hang out with my students, because culture, as we know ,is not just a mirror that we hold up to ourselves, and it reflects our values and our interests and our history. Culture is an actor. Culture creates and upholds and strengthens those values and histories and interests. A challenge I really have in teaching Disney classes… it’s a challenge I embrace… is to help students see that Disney is not just something they consume. It’s not just fun, simple entertainment for kids. Rather, Disney is doing consumptive work on us. Disney is commanding our attention. It is directing our attention towards certain narratives and stories while obscuring others. Disney’s upholding certain norms about gender and sexuality and body size and attractiveness and ethnohistories and race-based stories, et cetera. And of course, Disney loves to gobble up all our money while doing that. [LAUGHTER] Any college-level exploration of Disney must look critically at all of that. And this is not to say that Disney is bad. I don’t subscribe to any simple villainization of Disney, any more than I subscribe to a simple villainization of religion and religious systems as a religious study scholar. Nothing is all bad and just brainwashing. When we learn about humans and human culture and relationships, what can we learn about the appeal of Disney or the appeal of religion? There’s something there that’s worth looking at. We shouldn’t just dismiss it. I was teaching this FYS first-year seminar on Disney in 2016 when Trump’s Make America Great again slogan was becoming ubiquitous, and I remember talking to students at that time like, what does MAGA mean? What time and place does it refer to, do you think? And wasn’t hard for them to connect what they thought MAGA meant to some of the simple and sanitized and incomplete histories that Disney puts forward, that you might find walking down Disney’s Main Street USA, or in Frontierland, or in some of Disney films. Walt Disney was a patriot, no question. He loved America. He was desperate to serve in World War One, and he lied about his age in order to do so. He was fixated on Abraham Lincoln. The studio made anti-Nazi, pro-allies propaganda during World War Two. So he was really very much a patriot, and he was really concerned about telling an American story, but as scholars and as students, we get to question those stories as perhaps being more complicated than what’s been presented to us. And so the book, Why the Magic Matters, looks at this very question. So we have a couple of chapters that explore this. We have a historian named Alex Hoffman in the book. He’s out of U of Chicago. He teaches a course and his chapter, they’re both titled “Theme Park America,” and in Why the Magic Matters, he sort of takes readers on a walking tour of 1955 Disneyland, when Disneyland first opened. And he looks at some of these historical sections of the park, Main Street, Adventure Land, Frontier land, and he explains the choices Disney made in designing those lands, as Disney did. But he also looks at the American history beneath Disney’s depiction, and in so doing, he unearths racism, the Cold War, and like anti communist anxieties in the country in the 1950s the impact of settler-colonialism, and all of this as he helps us to read Disneyland in a historically authentic way, as opposed to the Disney sanitized way. A couple other chapters deal with this, but another one that springs to mind is one by Lucy Buck, who is an indigenous man. And in his chapter, which is called “Urban Indians in the House of Mouse,” he walks readers through his emotional development and his intellectual awakening as an indigenous person who grew up in Southern California, really close to Disneyland. And he talks about how his time in college, studying ethnomusicology and indigenous studies led him to see Disney’s films really differently, and more optimistically, it allowed him to try to envision a world where native creativity and culture could be represented and celebrated. iI my classes, there’s always a point where students are like, “You are ruining our childhood.” I have heard that so many times in so many forms, but thankfully, it’s a whole semester, and not just like a lecture, which would leave them kind of defeated, but they have a whole semester to gnaw on this material. And my goal is really to help them feel empowered in developing richer analyses of the world around them, because I really believe that once you can critically examine something, we can enjoy it without guilt or without fear of manipulation or without threat of loss of critical thought. I really hope that the class is an invitation to see Disney differently, but in so doing, these things in the world that we take for granted as being one way but can actually be something else, and the book tries to model that in a number of its chapters.

John: So the version of the world that Disney was creating was one that was very similar to the type of world that was presented in other forms of media in the 1950s and 60s, but it’s been moving towards a much more inclusive depiction of the world in recent years, but that’s led to quite a bit of controversy, as you mentioned, with the governor and also with our President. Was this type of culture war, perhaps inevitable for Disney to go through as we move towards a more diverse population and moving towards a white minority population?

Jill: This is such an important question. We talk about this in my classes. Here’s a mess of thoughts. I don’t think that conflict was inevitable because of changing demographics. I think Disney was always going to, of course, try to include more types of people as the American demographic shifted because, well, the money motive is obvious. It’s somewhat cynical, but it’s obvious. If Disney can create more fans and more people invested in its stories, that’s great for Disney as a company. But another thing that I like to think about is who creates Disney films and characters and rides and attractions and merchandise, like complex, interesting, rich identity, human people. Many of these creative types have a really wide range of identities. So it goes beyond this Disney’s bottom line to include consideration of the artists, the animators, the Imagineers who want to see themselves and their loved ones in Disney stories. So I think that was going to happen. Was the conflict inevitable? And perhaps I’m too naive, but I don’t think including more people in the story is going to lead to automatic resentment without certain cultural forces and political forces stoking those fires. The anger directed at Disney has to be put into a context of social media algorithms [LAUGHTER] and exploiting politicians. As soon as anyone with any sort of power and authority start to draw lines in the sand, companies like Disney are going to fall on one part of that line or the other, and whoever’s not on the side with Disney is going to be angry at Disney. They’re going to take it really personally. An obvious recent example is ABC Disney’s indefinite cancelation of Jimmy Kimmel Live, which at the time of taping, because we’re taping this, it is back on, It has been on back on for a few weeks, but Disney was in a damned if you do and damned if you don’t situation there. I’m in no way defending what Disney did, but in the minds of the public, Disney was going to infuriate huge groups of people no matter what they did. I don’t know, as a Disney scholar and professor, I’m always more interested in thinking about what the fights that Disney get embroiled in say about Disney as a cultural powerhouse, because Disney is shared American culture. Americans do believe they have some sort of stake in the ownership of Disney, even if they’re not really fans or consumers. They think that Disney is American, and thus Disney is theirs, because Disney is so intertwined with American culture and American values and American’s perception of history, if Disney does something somebody doesn’t like, many critics aren’t going to just see that as this huge corporation making a business decision. They’re going to be like, “this is an assault on my values and America’s story.” It’s going to hit emotionally, because Disney is all about emotion. It generates emotion. We do have some chapters in the book that try to look at this complicated question. So there’s one chapter called “Only Correct,” which is a play on Ian Forrester’s line, “Only Connect.” This is by Bonnie Rudner, who teaches literature up in Boston, and she’s looking at what she calls the corrections that Disney makes to its popular IP to its popular intellectual property. So specifically, she’s looking at Disney Renaissance films: Little Mermaid, Beauty and the Beast, Aladdin, Pocahontas. And she looks at first, how did Disney change it from its original form of a folk tale or a historic story to put it on the screen? But then, how is Disney changing it again, as it becomes live action or staged on Broadway? And she’s offering us a way to think about these corrections that goes beyond like a knee jerk “I don’t like the black mermaid because the mermaid should be white.” We know that that’s simplistic. What other opportunities are there for analysis that are rich but not just reactive. So we have other chapters like that. We have a chapter by a museum specialist, Bethanee Bemis, who is looking at Main Street, just an experience walking down Main Street USA as something that is deeply rooted to our senses and to embodiment. And what does that bake into us, in some ways about the American experience, even though it’s completely ahistorical like the actual Main Street USA, would probably have been filthy and a little bit scary, stinky, [LAUGHTER] what would have actually been in the street of a Main Street USA. Also, some of main streets by the turn of the 20th century were struggling economically. But what she looks at is how Disney’s creation of this main street imprints on us sensorily. And then she starts to look at some of the changes Disney has made to add more inclusion into its parks, and the implications of that, both in shifting our histories, but also inviting more people into the American story. You all are asking really good questions, and it’s things that our experts in the book are thinking about as well.

Rebecca: Giroux’s book, The Mouse that Roared: Disney and the End of Innocence, argues that Disney’s influence on the culture was dangerous. Do the authors of Why the Magic Matters share this concern.

Jill: The contributors don’t speak with one voice. There are 22 contributors in the book, but I think some of our contributors would say that there are elements of Disney that could be considered, quote, unquote, dangerous. Some of Disney’s stories, its depictions of race or ethnicity or body type, just capitalism, like all of these could be read as dangerous or potentially dangerous if misused. But we also have contributors who, I think, kind of unabashedly love Disney, and in fact, their careers have centered around celebrating the company and its history for what it can offer. Two chapters that come to mind here: we have this delightful chapter by Christopher Tremblay. Was a scholar and a teacher, and every summer, he takes students on this experiential travel course called “Walt’s pilgrimage.” He takes students basically along Walt Disney’s biography. So like Chicago, Illinois to Marceline, Missouri to Kansas City, out to California, ending at Disneyland and Forest Lawn Cemetery, where Walt is interred. They learn Walt’s life story as well as all these inevitable lessons about business and pushing through hardship, about hope in the face of adversity, and also about placed-based learning and ethnographic discovery. And so that chapter treats some of Walt’s complexity, but it’s more like, what can Walt teach us? Another chapter that’s like that is Jeff Barnes has a chapter, a class that he teaches at Disneyland. So in the chapter, he’s like walking us through Disneyland, and stops at these landmarks to talk about what students can learn, about leadership, about how to treat people in a working environment, about collaboration, all of that. So there are really a range of perspectives in the book, some that are more critical and sort of begging Disney to do and be better. And then we have some chapters that are like, Disney is what it is. It’s hugely influential. This is how it can make sense for you, and how you can sort of deploy some of its techniques. Like Disney’s been a remarkably successful company for much of its 100 years. What are they doing well, and what can we learn? So there’s a real range of voices in the book, and this is a nice moment to be doing Disney studies. I would say Disney studies, like when I was first reading it, like Disney studies in the 1990s and the early 2000s tended to be more critical and even angry. It was sort of fun to tear down Disney, and not entirely difficult to do[LAUGHTER] if you came at it from a certain perspective. But I have never found like a complete dangerous tear down as something that students respond well to. It also lacks the kind of nuanced thinking that I want students to practice directed at any subject. I think there are things about Disney that could be dangerous, like if speaking for myself, anything that is as culturally prominent as Disney must be critically examined and understood. We can’t just take it at face value, because doing so, that could become dangerous, in a way that ignorance in the face of power is always dangerous. So I wouldn’t say Disney’s dangerous. I’d say ignorance and uncritical reflection about Disney can be dangerous. So that’s one of my big motives in teaching the class.

John: Speaking of a nuanced approach, the book is organized into sections that represent dialectical pairs. Can you explain this approach and describe the sections that you’ve included in the book? I thought that was a really interesting way of organizing the structure of this.

Jill: Yeah, thanks. So the book is organized into these four sections with a pairing of terms that may seem contradictory, but in fact, like when we look deeply at Disney, we see that these ideas that seem contradictory actually go hand in hand. I describe it this way, like the book is organized around tensions, and thinking about Disney holding in tension a range of ideas, helps to negate any sort of black and white thinking about Disney, it’s not pure celebration, it’s not pure criticism. It’s about this nuance. For instance, one of these dialectical pairings in the first section is magic and strategy. I wrote the intro to that first section, and in that introduction, I lay out how magic is like one of those go to buzzwords that everybody associates with Disney nowadays, Disney equals magic, and yet, so much of what Disney does is meant to look magical and feel magical, but it is, in fact, deeply strategic. It is done by very talented artists and business people and cast members who are creating magic. Disney’s a multi-billion dollar company that knows how to press on your motions and win your brand loyalty. The chapters in that magic and strategy section look at how Disney does both things. It creates magic and operates strategically to create magic. The dialectic approaches, it’s a great one for teaching. I love to use dialectic in the theory portions of my courses, because they really push students out of black and white thinking. When I teach, for instance, African American religion, there’s this great book that explores the dialectical model of the black church, that’s Lincoln and Mamiya have developed that theory, and it’s great, because it’s like nothing is just one thing. It is a mess, a beautiful mess of contradictory things. My first book was called Womanpriest: Tradition and Transgression in the Contemporary Roman Catholic Church. So even there, I was playing with tension with these two concepts that seem contradictory, but are, in fact, essential to the thing itself. I know Alexis has experience with dialectics in a therapeutic form, because she also has a background in psychology, and I use them in some of my teaching as well. And so the humanities professor in me and the social scientist and her like, both resonated with this dialectic approach, this theory of tensions. So we have magic and strategy. We have leisure and labor. We have authenticity and simulation, and we have nostalgia and innovation. Those are our four sets of pairs, and each of those words seems like that they want to fight each other, but in Disney, they coexist and create what Disney is.

Rebecca: Who is the intended audience of your book? You’ve kind of hinted at some potential audiences. Can you talk a little bit about who your intended audience is and maybe who might also benefit from your book?

Jill: We would love the book to find wide readership among Disney fans who are interested in a more academic, dare I say, nerdy, take on Disney. And we also envision this as a book for college students taking college courses on Disney. We learned in the process of doing this book that there are a whole lot of Disney courses out there taught from a range of disciplinary perspectives. It was one of the things that got the publisher’s attention that this book, targeted at undergrads, could actually find a home in courses. xc, who I mentioned earlier, has written an academic article… it was probably like seven or eight years ago now… but he looked at all of these Disney courses that he could find, like on college websites and things, and he found 70 happening in various colleges and universities. And I know there are more. So we definitely think the book could be for college students, but I’ve been recommending the book to like friends who have teenagers who love Disney, like, “hey, if they love this, they’re going to love getting to learn about this, and they may actually find some interesting academic disciplines that they hadn’t thought about via Disney.” I think the book could be really for a wide range of people. We made sure that it was accessible, that the language was not something that would be too intimidating. This is not like just aimed at a very small number of academics. We want this to be something that people might pick up and read a chapter here and there. It should be something that is Invitational to educated readers who are curious.

John: So given all those courses out there, have you considered coming up with a second edition or an expanded edition of this?

Jill: We were told by the publisher, it depends how well this one does. So if you all like this book, buy it for your friends. It’s great for Christmas gifts. Yeah, they said there’s, I forget the number, but there’s a number of books that they like to see published before they talk about another edition. That’s what they told us. Hopefully it will go over really well, and that there will be a demand for more, because I know there are many more scholars out there doing really awesome things in the classroom around Disney, and I think the more we share that, the more we can think about Disney in fun ways, and also the more we can make a case for higher ed and education being something that really can operate in one sort of day to day life, or one’s experience of life, if Disney is just entertainment, we can think about those things richly. We’ll see John, hopefully.

Rebecca: So we always wrap up by asking, as you know, what’s next?

Jill: So research wise, I’m hoping to get back to my solo Disney book project. I sort of tabled that when Why the Magic Matters started to take off about two and a half, three years ago. So I’m hoping to get back to it. That project is called Faith, Trust, and Pixie Dust: Enchanting and Evangelizing America. That’s currently the title, and it looks at Disney alongside American religious history. I don’t want to say it’s Disney is a religion, but how the ways we can analyze Disney can intertwine with the ways we can understand religion, and in so doing, understand religion more richly and how it operates in the world, and understand Disney more richly and how it operates in the world. So I’m eager to get back to that. In addition, even though my Womanpriest book came out five years ago, now I’m still writing and talking a lot about women’s ordination and the Catholic Church. I’m, in fact, headed to Venice, Italy in a couple of weeks for a conference at the end of October where I’m going to talk about women’s ordination and different types of Catholic feminisms, like comparing North American Catholic feminisms in European. So I’m grateful that there’s still a lot for me to talk about with that. In terms of teaching. I’m not sure when I’m going to teach Disney again, maybe next fall. We’ll see how scheduling works out, but I would love to use this book in the classroom to see how that works. I am designing currently a new course for spring 2026 which is called The Holocaust and Contemporary Issues. It was Holocaust studies that got me into academia, that got me into religious studies in the first place. It was transformative to me as a 19-year old to understand the magnitude of what happened with the Holocaust and the implications of that. I’ve often taught an upper-level Holocaust course, but I’m developing a class that’s for first years or sophomore, students who haven’t a lot of experience in religious studies. And we’re going to spend about a month on Holocaust history, and then we’re going to look at what’s emerged since that’s related. So we’re going to do a unit on the Rwandan genocide. We’re going to look at some of Timothy Snyder’s work on rising authoritarianism in the 21st Century. We’re going to look at the situation in Gaza, nothing controversial at all. So basically, we’re going to ask what faith-filled resistance looks like. What does it mean to stand up against oppression and injustice in today’s world? I don’t know what will happen with that, but I’m really excited. I feel a call. I feel an obligation to dive into those hard issues. So that’s what I’m working on in the classroom.

John: Well, those are challenging issues, but very much needed, I think, in terms of education today, but it’s kind of nice also to take a break and reflect on magic and bringing some magic into lives where so much of the news that we see is much less magical right now.

Jill: I’ve had students joke that I’m the Holocaust professor and the Disney professor and like that… [LAUGHTER] I don’t know… is that a dialectic tension?

Rebecca: Is that a way to balance it all out?

Jill: Exactly. So I’m like, “Yeah, you’re right, those seem antithetical, and yet they coexist in my teaching and my research interest.”

Rebecca: Super comfortable in that gray zone, that’s for sure.

Jill: Yes.

Rebecca: Well, thank you so much for joining us, and we look forward to talking to you in the future about some of your other projects that you’re working on.

Jill: Thank you both so much. You all do so much good work with this podcast. I’m happy to be part of it.

John: Well, thanks, Jill, and I hope I’ll see you one of these days back in Durham, I’m still coming down there in the summers, or at least I have been so far.

[MUSIC]

John: If you’ve enjoyed this podcast, please subscribe and leave a review on Apple Podcasts or your favorite podcast service. To continue the conversation, join us on our Tea for Teaching Facebook page.

Rebecca: You can find show notes, transcripts and other materials on teaforteaching.com. Music by Michael Gary Brewer.

John: Editing Assistance provided by Madison Lee.

[MUSIC]